NCD095458527_20000310_FCX Inc. (Statesville)_FRBCERCLA RD_Final Technical Specification for OU-3 Attachment 1-OCR

D
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ATTACHMENT 1
pr-cEIVED
APR O 1 2000
SUPERFUN0 SECTION
FINAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR
OPERABLE UNIT THREE (OU3)
FCX-STATESVILLE SUPERFUND SITE
STATESVILLE, NORTH CAROLINA
prepared for
El Paso Energy Corporation
1001 Louisiana Street
Houston, TX 77002
March 2000
27-60313.011
I
I
g
D
B
m
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER'S CERTIFICATION
This FCX Operable Unit Three (OU3) Remedial Design has been prepared under the
direction and supervision of a qualified, State of North Carolina licensed, Professional
Engineer. Mr. Robert E. Ash, IV, P.E., of Brown and Caldwell was responsible for the
overall preparation of the Design. Portions of the Remedial Design were prepared by
subcontractors. Mr. Mathew B. Dozier, P.E. and Mr. M. Hall Oakley, P.E. of Smith
Seckman Reid were responsible for the electrical, and the structural portions of the design,
respectively. Professional Engineer's certifications are included in this section.
\ \BCNSH03\PROJECTS\PROJ\603l3.011 \certpagcs.doc
a
D
D
H
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER'S CERTIFICATION
This is to certify that the FCX Operable Unit Three (OU3) Remedial Design for the FCX
Superfund Site in Statesville, North Carolina was prepared under my direction and
superv1S1on.
. Robert ~-A,h, IV, P E.
3/20/oo , 7
Date
North Caroiiria Registration No. 23295
P:\PROJ\60313.011 \certpages.doc
I
m
D
D
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER'S CERTIFICATION
This is to certify that the electrical design of the FCX OU3 Remedial Design for the FCX
Superfund Site in Statesville, North Carolina was prepared under my direction and
supervision.
•
er, P.E. Date
North Carolina Registration No. 18634
I
•
I
n
n
m
m
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER'S CERTIFICATION
This is to certify that the Structural Design of the FCX OU3 Remedial Design for the
FCX Superfund Site in Statesville, North Carolina was prepared under my direction and
supervis1on.
all Oakley, P.E.
North Carolina Registration
n
D
•
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 1 -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01010 SUMMARY OF WORK
01027 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
01035 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
01040 PROJECT COORDINATION
01050 CONTRACTOR FIELD ENGINEERING
01060 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
01120 SITE MAINTENANCE
01160 HEALTH AND SAFETY PLAN (HASP)
01200 PROJECT MEETINGS AND ADMINISTRATION
01300 SUBMITTALS
01310 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE
01340 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
01370 .SCHEDULE OF VALUES
01380 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS
01400 QUALITY CONTROL
01405 YEAR 2000 PERFORMANCE WARRANTY
01500 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS
01540 SECURITY
01560 DUST AND NOISE CONTROLS
01600 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
01660 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING OF SYSTEMS
01700 PROJECT CLOSEOUT
01730 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
DIVISION 2 -SITE WORK
02070 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
02220 EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING
02444 CHAIN LINK FENCING
02672 WELL DRILLING AND CASING
DIVISIONS 3-4 -NOT USED
DIVISION 5 -METALS
05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL
DIVISIONS 6-7 -NOT USED
DIVISION 8 -DOORS AND WINDOWS
08331 COILING DOOR
DIVISIONS 9-10 -NOT USED
P:\PROJ\6031J.Oll\9pectoc.doc 1
a
I
D
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 11 -EQUIPMENT
11500 PACKAGED GAC SYSTEM
DIVISIONS 12-14 -NOT USED
DIVISION 15 -MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
15010 MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
15060 PIPING SYSTEMS AND APPURTENANCES
15140 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15260 PIPING INSULATION
15481 PACKAGED AIR SPARGING SYSTEM
15489 PACKAGED SOIL VAPOR EXTRACTION SYSTEM
DIVISION 16 -ELECTRICAL
16010 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16050 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
16110 RACEWAYS AND CONDUIT SYSTEMS
16121 CONDUCTORS -600 VOLTS AND BELOW
16130 OUTLET BOXES
16131 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
16134 PANELBOARDS
16140 WIRING DEVICES
16141 DEVICE PLATES
16170 SAFETY SWITCHES
16190 SUPPORTING DEVICES AND HANGERS
16450 GROUNDING
16480 MOTOR STARTERS
16603 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION
16900 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
16901 SCADA OPERATOR INTERFACE
DESIGN PLANS (see Attachment 2)
P:\PROJ\60313.011\,pectoc.doc 2
I
m
I
m
D
D
m
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
\\BCNSH03\PROJECTS\PROJ\6031J.Oll\spectoc.doc
I
I
I
I
I
I
a
I
g
g
I
I
PART 1 -GENERAL
SCOPE OF WORK
SECTION 01010
SUMMARY OF WORK
A. Contractor shall be responsible for executing Work shown
on Drawings, called for in Technical Specifications
(Specifications), and other Contract Documents and as
necessary for a complete installation of an air sparging
and soil vapor extraction (AS/SVE) system at Operable
Unit 3 (OU3) of the FCX-Sta tesville Super fund Site in
Statesville, North Carolina. Contractor shall furnish
machinery, tools, equipment, material, labor and any
other means and methods necessary to make Work
satisfactory, complete, neat, and finished through
acceptance by Owner.
B. Work consists of,
installation of an
related Work as
Specifications. A
Contractor follows:
but shall not be limited to,
AS/SVE system including all other
designated by Drawings and/or
summary of Work to be performed by
1. Prepare submittals including written Health and
Safety Plan (HASP)
2.
3 .
4 .
5 .
Mobilize to Site.
Install exterior door for access to AS/SVE equipment
area in plant building.
Install two ( 2) dual-purpose AS /SVE wells including
containerization of waste.
Install eight (8) SVE wells including
containerization of waste.
6. Install fourteen (14) monitoring probes including
containerization of waste.
7. Install packaged air sparging system.
8. Install packaged SVE system.
9. Install packaged granular activated carbon (GAC)
system and exhaust stack.
10. Install programmable logic controller (PLC) to
include supervisory control and data acquisition
(SCADA) capabilities, remote dial up capabilities,
and related hardware and software.
\\BCNSHOJ\PROJECTS\PROJ\60313.011\01010.doc 01010-1
I
I
g
n
D
I
D
D
I
g
I
11. Configure and program PLC software
and remote dial up systems as
complete operating control system.
including SCA DA
required for a
12. Install security fence around packaged systems and
PLC.
13. Install related piping, headers, pipe hangers, and
appurtenances.
1 4 . Install ·instrumentation and electrical wiring of
systems.
15. Perform testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems
including but not limited to: pressures,
differential pressures, vacuums, flow rates, motor
currents, temperatures, operation of PLC including
SCADA and remote dial up systems, etc.
16. Demobilize from Site.
C. All incidental, minor and miscellaneous items, Work, and
materials for which no payment is specifically provided,
and any items, Work, and materials not specified or
shown which are necessary to complete Work and to
maintain and repair Work, or which may be fairly implied
as included, shall be done and furnished by Contractor
at no cost to Owner.
D. Design intent, as determined by Engineer, shall govern
in case of discrepancy in or between Drawings and
Specifications. Specifications are intended to
supplement and clarify Drawings, as sometimes Work is
called for in Specifications that is not shown on
Drawings, and sometimes Drawings indicate Work that is
not mentioned in Specifications. Both Drawings and
Specifications must be complied with in order to fulfill
Contract requirements, and any Work called for by either
is as binding as though it was called for by both.
Contractor shall take no advantage of any error or
omission in Drawings or of any discrepancy between
Drawings and Specifications. In all cases of doubt as
to true meaning of Drawings and Specifications, the
decision of Engineer will be final and conclusive.
1.02 REFERENCES TO
REQUIREMENTS
OTHER SPECIFICATIONS, STANDARDS, OR
A. Wherever in Contract Documents references are made to
other specifications, standards, or requirements, it
shall be understood that the latest editions or versions
of specifications, standards, or requirements are
. intended and shall apply, except as otherwise specified
or to the extent that said specifications, standards, or
requirements may be in conflict with applicable laws,
ordinances, rules, and regulations.
\ \BCll.'.'iHOJ \ PROJECTS \PP.OJ\ 6/JJ l J , 0 11 \0 IO IO . doc 01010-2
I
I
I
I
I
D
n
D
D
D
D
0
u
1.03 SUPPLEMENTAL DEFINITION OF PARTIES
A. Following
definitions
Conditions:
definitions
contained
are intended
within Division
to
0
supplement
General
1. 04
1. Owner's Representative: Owner's Representative is
person or organization that is authorized by Owner
to make decisions as specified herein. Owner's
Representative may be an employee of Owner or a firm
hired by Owner or both.
2. Engineer: Engineer is person or organization that
is authorized by Owner to make engineering decisions
as specified herein. Engineer may be same person or
organization as Owner's Representative.
B. Designation of specific person or organization for
Owner's Representative and Engineer will be established
at pre-construction meeting.
ENUMERATION OF CONTRACT DRAWINGS
A. See Drawing ''Cover Sheet'' for list of Contract Drawings.
1.05 WORK BY OTHERS
A. Disposal of all hazardous wastes generated from Work
will be performed by Owner or by others. Contractor
shall be responsible for packaging all wastes per
Owner's procedures. Contractor shall be responsible for
waste until time it is removed from Site for disposal.
B. Removal of major obstructions, equipment, and other
materials that prevent access to Jobsite will be
performed by Owner. A minimum of one week notice shall
be given to Owner to provide access.
C. Coordinate with Owner's Representative for sampling of
soil and groundwater from wells and probes.
1.06
D. Coordinate with Owner's
performance testing.
WORK SEQUENCE
Representative for system
A. Contractor shall sequence Work in a manner that will
allow Owner or occupant to maintain production or
similar activities in and around plant. Work shall be
sequenced to minimize areas disturbed. Contractor must
ensure that Owner's operations or activities are not
disturbed or prohibited as a result of Work.
B. Work sequence shall be conducted in a manner that will
prevent contamination of clean surf aces; minimize
health, safety, and environmental risks; .and minimize
\ \BCNSllO 3 \ PROJECTS\ PROJ\ 6[J 313. 0 I l \0 l O l O , doc 01010-3
I
I
I
I
D
D
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.07
generation of hazardous waste that will require disposal
by Owner.
CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES
A. Contractor's use of premises shall be confined to Limits
of Work shown on Drawings or as otherwise approved by
Owner. Limits of Work shall be confined to smallest
area possible and area used shall not interfere with
Owner's or occupants operations. Equipment staging
areas, equipment and material storage areas, and
decontamination stations shall be within Contractor's
Limits of Work. Ingress and egress to and from Jobsite
shall be by means designated by Owner only. Under no
circumstances shall Contractor perform any Work or
conduct any activities at Jobsite outside of
Contractor's Limits of Work or use any other means of
ingress or egress to and from Jobsite without approval
by Owner.
B. Contractor shall:
1. Assume full responsibility for protection and
safekeeping of products stored on or off Jobsite.
2. Move stored equipment, materials, or other items
that interfere with operations of Owner or occupant.
3. Conform to all applicable laws,
permits, and Contract Documents.
regulations,
4. Obtain any permits required to perform Work.
5. Assume full responsibility for any contamination of
clean surfaces caused by Contractor's or
subcontractor's Work including decontamination of
any contaminated surface at no additional charge.
6. Assume full responsibility for health and safety of
Contractor's and subcontractors employees while at
Jobsite.
7. Time restrictions for performing exterior Work shall
be limited to daylight hours or in accordance with
local ordinances, whichever are more stringent.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 -EXECUTION
NOT USED
\ \BCUSHOJ \ PROJf.CTS \ ['!<OJ\ ~o 3 I 3 . 011 \U l O l O. doc
[END OF SECTION]
01010-4
I
I
I
I
I
0
D
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 1 -GENERAL
SECTION 01027
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
1. 01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Procedures for preparation and submittal of Applications
for Payment.
1. 02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Owner-Contractor Agreement: Contract Sum; Amounts of
Progress Payments and Retainages; Times for Submittals
B. Section 01300 -Submittals
C. Section 01340 -Submittal Schedule
D. Section 01700 -Project Closeout
1.03 FORMAT
A. Submit application for payment in a form ,acceptable to
the Owner. Owner recommends that EJCDC Document
No. 1910-8-E "Application for Payment'' form be used for
all projects unless otherwise approved. A copy of the
EJCDC document is included in the Division O Exhibits.
B. For each item, provide a column for listing: item
number; description of work; scheduled value; percentage
value; previous applications; work in place and on-site
stored materials under this application; authorized
change orders; total completed to date of application;
percentage of completion; balance to finish; and
retainage.
1.04 PREPARATION OF APPLICATIONS
A. Type required information.
B. Execute
officer.
certification by signature of authorized
C. Use data on accepted Bid Form. Provide dollar value in
each column for each line item for portion of Work
performed.
\\BCN::i!l03\PPOJtCTS\PPO.J\603!3.0ll\01027.doc 01027-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
u
D
D
I
D
D
n
I
I
1.05
D. List each authorized
continuation sheet,
dollar amount as for
SUBMITTAL PROCEDCRES
Change Order as an extension on
listing Change Order number and
an original item of Work.
A. Submit Application for Payment at times stipulated in
Agreement, or as directed by Owner.
B. Submit under transmittal procedures specified in Section
01300.
1.06 SUBSTANTIATING DATA
A. When Owner requires substantiating information, submit
data justifying line item amounts in question.
B. Provide one copy of data with cover letter for each copy
of submittal. Show Application number and date, and
line item by number and description.
C. Prior to each request for partial progress payment,
Owner's Representative will review record drawings with
Contractor. Progress payments may be reduced by as much
as 15 percent if record drawings are not current.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 -EXECUTION
NOT USED
\ \BCNSfl03\Pf<.O,Jf.CTS\PROJ\ 61'.l3l 3. 01 l \0102? .doc
[END OF SECTION]
01027-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
n
I
g
D
0
D
D
D
I
PART 1 -GENERAL
SECTION 01035
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
1. 01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDE
A. Procedures for processing Change Orders.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 00700 -General Conditions of the Contract for
Construction
B. Section 01300 -Submittals
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit name of individual authorized to accept changes
and to be responsible for informing others in
Contractor's employ of changes in Work.
1. 04
B. Change Order Form: Form acceptable to Owner is included
in Division O Exhibits.
CHANGES
A. The cost or credit to Owner resulting from a change in
Work shall be determined by one of the methods described
below and supported by sufficient substantiating data to
permit evaluation.
1. By Unit Prices stated in Contract Documents or
subsequently agreed upon;
2. By Lump Sum.
3. By Time and Material.
4. By Time and material with a Not-to-Exceed Limit.
B. Provide to the Owner following data to support
Contractor's claim:
1. Quantities of products, labor, and equipment.
2. Taxes, insurance, and bonds.
3. Overhead and profit.
4. Justification for any change in Contract Times as
defined in Section 00700, Article 1.01.
I':\ r1\0,I\ ~r,J l J. riJ 1 \fJ l/JJ~. doc 01035-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
n
0
0
D
D
D
0
5. Credit for deletions from Contract, similarly
documented.
6. Invoices and receipts for products, equipment, and
subcontracts, similarly documented.
C. Provide with each claim for additional costs the
following inf6rmation:
1. Origin and date of claim, unless Owner has requested
the additional work.
2. On a form provided by Owner, Contractor shall
document Work performed, materials used, employee's
names, and hours worked. Form is to be signed by
authorized Owner's Representative each day.
3. Submit itemized account and supporting data after .
completion of change, within time limits in
Conditions of Contract. Supporting data shall
consist of original invoices, time cards, time
records and wage rates paid, material take-off
receipts, and other supportable data.
4. Subcontractor's invoices and receipts for products
and time charges shall be similarly documented.
D. Owner will determine the change allowable in Contract
Sum and Contract Time as provided in Conditions of the
Contract.
E. Document each quotation for a change in cost or time
with sufficient data to allow evaluation of quotation.
1.05 EXECUTION OF CHANGE ORDERS
A. Owner will issue a written acceptance of Change Order.
B. A single Amendment to Contract may consist of one or
more Change Orders making up an Amendment to the
Contract. Contractor and Owner shall together determine
and agree upon frequency of Amendments to Contract.
C. Each Change Order shall provide dollar amount of change,
subdivided into Labor, Materials, and Sales/Use Tax.
Each Amendment to Contract will be sum total of Change
Orders subdivided in to Labor, Materials, and Sales /Use
Tax.
1.06 CHANGE ORDER MARK-UP
A. Adjustments to Contract sum may include a percentage for
mark-up as provided in Section 00700.
P: \PROJ\60313, 011 \01035 .doc 01035-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
u
1.07 CORRELATION OF CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. After receipt of Amendment to Purchase Order and/or
Contract promptly revise Schedule of Values and
Application for Payment forms to record each authorized
Change Order as a separate line item and adjust Contract
Sum as shown on Change Order.
B. Promptly revise Progress Schedule to reflect any change
in Contract Time, revise subschedules to adjust time for
other items of Work affected by change, and resubmit.
C. Promptly enter changes in Project Record Documents.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 -EXECUTION
NOT USED
P:\PROJ\60313.011\0103~.ctoc
[END OF SECTION]
01035-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
g
I
D
SECTION 01040
PROJECT COORDINATION
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Owner
B. Owner's Representative
C. Access to Work
D. Sampling and Analyses by Owner's Representative
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01160 -Health and Safety Plan (HASP)
B. Section 01200 -Project Meetings and Administration
1. 03 OWNER
A. Contractor shall cooperate with Owner and Owner's
Representative in all activities as necessary to
ascertain compliance with the Contract Documents,
including but not limited to providing data,
providing working record drawings, site security,
site access, and any reasonable requests for
information or use of personnel and equipment at no
additional cost to Owner.
1. 04
B. Contractor shall cooperate with building occupant
so a not to interfere with occupant's normal
operations in and around the building.
OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE
A. Owner's Representative will be at the contract Work
area during Work activities to observe progress and
quality of the executed Work. On basis of his Work
area observations, Owner's Representative will keep
Owner informed of quality of Work and will endeavor
to guard Owner against defects and deficiencies in
Work of Contractor. Owner's Representative may
disapprove Work as failing to conform to Contract
Documents. Whenever it is considered necessary or
advisable for proper execution of intent of
Contract Documents, Owner's Representative shall
have authority to require Contractor to make
special examination or testing of Work at any stage
of Work progress.
\ \BCN!:1111 3 \PROJECT~\ rROJ\ 60) I 3 . 0 11\011/4 0. doc 01040-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
g
B. No maiter how extensive or intensive the
inspection, Owner's Representative will not be
responsible for construction means, methods,
techniques, sequences or procedures, or for safety
precautions and programs in connection with Work,
and will not be responsible for Contractor's
failure to carry out Work in accordance with
Contract Documents. Owner's Representative's
duties, services, and work shall in no way
supersede or dilute Contractor's obligation to
perform Work in conformance with all Contract
requirements. Owner's Representative is empowered
by Owner to act on its behalf with respect to
proper execution of Work and to give instructions
when necessary to require such corrective measures
as may be necessary in professional opinion of
Owner's Representative for proper execution of
Contract or to protect Owner's interest.
1.05 ACCESS TO WORK
A. Owner, its Representative, Engineers, Inspectors,
Agents, other employees and representatives of
local, State and Federal regulatory agencies shall
for any purpose, and any other parties who may
enter into contracts with Owner for doing Work
within the area covered by the Contract shall, for
all purposes which may be required by their
contracts, have access to Work and premises used by
Contractor, and Contractor shall provide safe and
proper facilities therefore. Contractor shall,
whenever so requested, provide to Owner's
Representative access to invoices, bills of lading,
etc.
1.06 SAMPLING AND ANALYSES BY THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE
A. Owner's Representative may conduct independent
observations or sampling and analyses for purpose
of assessing Work by Contractor. Contractor shall
fully cooperate with Owner's Representative in
collection of any such samples.
B. It is not Owner's intent to collect and analyze any
soil, air, water, or other samples to protect
welfare of Contractor's employees and/or agents.
Any sampling and analyses necessary to protect
health and welfare of Contractor's employees and/or
agents shall remain the sole responsibility of
Contractor.
\ \BCNSH03 \PIWJECTS\ PROJ\ 603 l J . 011\01040. doc 01040-2
I
I PART 2 -PRODUCTS
I NOT USED
I PART 3 -EXECUTION
NOT USED
I [END OF SECTION]
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
\ \BCN~HfJ 3\ rROJECT~ \ PROJ \ 60 313 . 011 \ l1 i 04 0. doc 01040-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
m
u
D
D
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 01050
CONTRACTOR FIELD ENGINEERING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Contractor shall retain services of an independent
registered Land Surveyor licensed in the State of North
Carolina to provide survey control for construction, and
to provide survey for record drawings for various
components of construction including but not limited to
well locations. Surveyor shall furnish all labor,
materials, tools, supervision, transportation, and
equipment necessary to perform surveying work as
specified herein for the air sparging and soil vapor
extraction systems, off-gas treatment system, and
supporting components, as shown on Drawings.
B. Work of this Section shall include, but not necessarily
be limited to: establishing survey control points,
stakeout, providing survey control during construction,
and providing final survey documentation (as-built
drawings) for all portions of the Work.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 02220 -Excavating, Backfilling, and Compacting
1. 03
B. Section 02672 -Well Drilling and Casing
QUALIFICATION OF SURVEYOR
A. Con tractor shall retain services
Surveyor licensed in the State
acceptable to Owner.
of a registered
of North Carolina
Land
and
B. Surveyor, in the opinion of Owner, shall have a proven
record of successful performance on projects of similar
magnitude. Prior to acceptance by Owner, Surveyor will
be required to submit a Survey Plan describing
qualifications. of survey crew chief and other key
personnel. s·urvey Plan must also provide Surveyor's
commitment to meet project schedule and provide required
Record Drawing documentation as expeditiously as
possible, and in accordance with requirements imposed by
project schedule.
01050-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
u
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1. 04 SUBMITTAL$
A. Submit name, address, and telephone number of Surveyor
prior to start of Site Work.
B. Prior to start of survey Work, submit Survey Plan
including project staffing, scheduling, type of
equipment Surveyor intends to use in field and in office
(i.e., instruments and computer software) to complete
project, and typical examples of final work product on
similar projects if available.
C. Submit documentation verifying accuracy of survey work
(i.e., signed and sealed drawings) .
D. Surveyor shall submit to Owner six (6) blueline copies
of record drawing documentation within fourteen days of
substantial completion of Work. Owner's Representative
will review record drawing documentation upon receipt
from Surveyor. Owner's Representative will notify
Contractor as to whether record drawing documentation
demonstrates construction to specified grades,
elevations, structure location, etc.
E. A minimum of six ( 6) certified blue line copies of the
final record drawing documentation shall be prepared
within 14 days after final review and approval by
Owner's Representative. One set of record drawings on
Mylar shall be provided to Owner. Final Record Drawings
shall also be provided to Owner on 3-1/2-inch computer
disk in AutoCAD (Release 14) format.
F. Record drawings documentation, signed and sealed by the
Surveyor, shall be provided after construction and shall
include, but not be limited to, a final site topographic
map at a scale of 1 inch equal to 40 feet and a 1-foot
contour interval, extending a minimum of 25 feet beyond
the limits of work and showing all planimetric features;
locations of all construction elements; inverts or
elevations of all piping; locations of all equipment;
and any other items necessary to accurately portray the
extent and location of the Work.
1.05 SURVEY REQUIREMENTS
A. Surveyor shall locate survey control points prior to
starting Site Work. Engineer shall be promptly notified
in writing of any discrepancies discovered before or
during construction.
B. Contractor shall protect each permanent survey control
point during construction. Contractor shall immediately
report, in writing, to Owner and Engineer any survey
control point which is lost, destroyed, or requires
\ \~ctn;!l(JJ\['k0,IE:CT5\PROJ\ ~'J3l1.011 \u 11,','J .dr.<: 01050-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D
D
E
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
relocation. Contractor
costs ass6ciated with
survey control point.
shall be responsible for all
reestablishing each permanent
C. Surveyor shall maintain lines and levels, layout, and
locate Work utilizing recognized engineering survey
practices. A complete and accurate log of control and
survey Work must be maintained. Surveyor shall provide,
at a minimum~ a detailed survey for the following
components:
1. Locations and elevations of installed structures,
above ground and below ground pipes, culverts, etc.,
manhole(s), water utilities, electric utilities, and
sewer utilities.
2. All other items that Contractor requires to complete
his Work.
3. All other reasonable items requested by Owner or
Owner's Representative associated with this project.
D. A detailed as-built drawing including topography survey
shall extend a minimum of 25 feet in all directions
beyond limits of construction.
E. Contractor shall be aware of surveying activities and
shall account for them in construction schedule.
F. Surveyor shall cooperate fully with the Engineer and
Owner's Representative at all times.
G. No surveying will be allowed between one
sunset and one hour after sunrise, ·unless
the Engineer and Owner's Representative.
1.06 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
hour before
approved by
A. Construction tolerances shall be as given in the various
Sections of these Specifications, and as given below.
B. Construction tolerances for trenches shall be within
plus or minus 0.1 feet from required elevations and
widths, and for new pavement shall be within plus or
minus 0.2 feet from required elevations and such to
promote positive drainage and meet Owner's approval.
C. Survey instruments
precision of O. 01
10 seconds.
\ \!lr":1/C: l{rl 3 \ rRO.JECTS \ l'ROJ '. {i(J 3 l J. 0 11 \ ti l O ',{J. do(;
used shall be capable of reading to a
feet and with a setting accuracy of
01050-3
I
I PART 2 -PRODUCTS
I NOT USED
I PART 3 -EXECUTION
NOT USED
I [END OF SECTION]
D
D
m
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I \ \llCNC>HOJ \ rRO.JECTS\ l'ROJ\ c,, 11) . (J 11 \O Ill~<! . due 01050-4
I
•
I
I
n
D
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 1 -GENERAL
SECTION 01060
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Performance of all on-site and off-site work in
accordance with all applicable regulations.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01560 -Dust and Noise Controls
B. Section 02220 -Excavating, Backfilling, and
Compacting
C. Section 02672 -Well Drilling and Casing
1.03 ON-SITE ACTIVITIES
A. On-Site Work must
environmental laws.
comply with following
1. Safe Drinking Water Act:
seq. Site remediation
result in groundwater
contamination.
42 U.S.C. 300f et
activities must not
or surface water
2. Federal Water Pollution Control Act
Water Act): 33 U.S.C. 1251 et seq.
(Clean
3. Clean Air Act: 42 U.S.C. 7401 et seq.
4. Resource Conservation and Recovery Act ( RCRA)
42 U.S.C. 6901 et seq.
5. Occupational Safety and Health Administration
(OSHA): 29 CFR 1910 and 1926.
6. North Carolina Regulations: 15A NCAC
1.04 OFF-SITE ACTIVITIES
A. Non-Hazardous Materials
1. State of North Carolina or local solid waste
regulations.
\ \EICNSHfJ J \ l'ROJECTS\ r?.OJ\ 60) l J.011 \ 0 l O 60. doc 01060-1
I
•
I
D
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. Transportation
1. Transportation of any raw materials must comply
with all applicable regulations including, but
not necessarily limited to, the following:
a. Department of Transportation: 49 CFR 171-179.
b. USEPA: 40 CFR 263 and 40 CFR 761 for any
hazardous materials disposed of off Site.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 -EXECUTION
NOT USED
\ \BCNSHIJ) \ f'ROJECTS \PP.O.J\ 60313 . 011\01 (J ~O. doc
[END OF SECTION]
01060-2
I
I
I
I
0
D
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 01120
SITE MAINTENANCE
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Maintenance Requirements
B. Materials
C. Work to be Performed
D. Project Closeout
1. 02 MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Conduct all
accordance with
and regulations.
1. 0 3 MATERIALS
Site
all
maintenance activities in
applicable codes, ordinances,
A. Use only cleaning materials and methods which will
not create health or environmental hazards.
1 . 0 4 WORK TO BE PERFORMED
A. Execute daily cleaning of Site to collect all
accumulated contaminated material, including
discarded health and safety equipment.
B. Execute periodic cleaning to keep project Site free
from accumulation of material resulting from Work.
C. Any non-hazardous solid wastes shall be transferred
daily into containers and staged as approved by
Owner or Owner's Representative and properly
disposed of off Site, unless otherwise directed by
Owner or Owner's Representative.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 -EXECUTION
NOT USED
r:\PROJ\6UJ13.0ll\Oll20.doc
[END OF SECTION]
01120-1
I
I
I
0
0
u
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I-
I
I
I
SECTION 01160
HEALTH AND SAFETY PLAN (HASP)
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Health and Safety Plan
B. Key Personnel/Identification of Health and Safety
Personnel
C. Task/Operation Safety and Health Risk Analysis
D. Personnel Training Requirements
E. Personal Protective Equipment to be Used
F. Medical Surveillance Requirements
G. Frequency and Types of Air Monitoring and Personnel
Air Sampling
H. Site Control Measures
I. Decontamination Plan (if applicable)
J. Emergency Response/Contingency Plan
K. Spill Containment Program
L. Additional Requirements
1. The objective of these procedures is to
minimize the risk of exposure to hazardous
substances/conditions by identifying,
evaluating and controlling potential safety and
heal th hazards. The HASP must address those
site activities and factors which impact
health, safety, and the environment during the
Construction period. These include without
limitation site activities which can cause
migration of site products such as dusts,
mists, fumes, and vapors to off-site locations.
2. Contractor shall be responsible for preparing
and implementing the HASP which shall apply to
all personnel on site during construction
including, but not limited to, the Contractor's
employees, subcontractor's employees, Owner,
and Owner's Representative.
\ \BCIl~l!01 \PROJE:CTf.\PROJ\C,IJJ 13. O) l \111 l (,(). d'JC 01160-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
0
I
D
D
D
0
0
D
I
1.02 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. Federal OSHA Standards
1. General Industry Standards and Interpretations;
Volumes 1 3-OSHA 2077; U.S. Department of
Labor, Occupational Safety and Health
Administration; Most current versions.
Specifically Sections:
1904
1910.120
1910.132
1910.146
1910.147
1910.301
1910.1000
1910.1001
1910.1025
1926
1990
Recordkeeping and Reporting of
Occupational Injuries and Illnesses
Hazardous Waste Operations and
Emergency Response
Subpart I, Personal Protective
Equipment
Permit Required Confined Space
Control of Hazardous Energy
(Lockout/Tagout)
Subpart S, Electrical Standards
Air Contaminants (PELs)
Asbestos (if applicable)
Lead (if applicable)
Hazard Communication
Safety and Health Regulations for
Construction
Identification, Classification and
Regulation of Potential Occupational
Carcinogens
2. Hazardous Waste Inspections Reference Manual;
U.S. Department of Labor; Occupational Safety
and Health Administration; 1986.
3 . OSHA Field Operations Manual; U.S.
of Labor; Occupational ~afety
Administration; most recent edition.
Department
and Health
B. Other Re-ferences and Standards.
1.
2 .
3 .
A Guide to the Safe Handling of Hazardous
Materials Accidents; ASTM Manual Series, MNLl0;
American Society for Testing and Materials; 2nd
Ed.; 1990.
Instruments; 6th
of Governmental
Air Sampling
Conference
Hygienists (ACGIH); 8th Ed.; 1995.
Ed.; American
Industrial
Dangerous Properties of Industrial Materials;
Sax, NI; Van Nostrand Reinhold; New York; 1995.
\ \BC/1!:HO.l\f'ROJEC'i'S \PPOJ\60313, 011\01160. doc 01160-2
I
I
D
D
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
4 .
5 .
6.
7.
8 .
9.
Fire Protection Guide on Hazardous Materials;
11th Ed.; National Fire Protection Association;
1994.
Fundamentals of Industrial Hygiene, 4th Ed.;
Chicago, IL; National Safety Council; 1995.
Guide
NIOSH
Health
to Industrial Respiratory Protection;
Publication 87-116; US Department of
and Human Services, Public Heal th
Service,
1987.
Centers for Disease Control, NIOSH;
Guidelines for the Selection of Personal
Protective Equipment; 3rd Ed.; Schwope, A. D.;
American Conference of Governmental Industrial
Hygienists; Cincinnati; 1987.
Hazardous Waste Handbook for Health and Safety;
Martin, W.F.; Lippit, J.M.; Prothero, T.C.;
Butterworth Publishers; 2nd Ed.; 1992.
Hazardous
Control;
Owner; 2nd
Materials Emergencies Response and
Cashmon, J.R.; Technomic Publishing
Ed.; 1988.
.10. NIOSH/OSHA Pocket Guide to Chemical Hazards;
U.S. Department of Heal th and Human Services,
Public Health Service, Centers for Disease
Control, NIOSH; 1994 or most current edition.
11. Occupational Health Guidelines for Chemical
Hazards; NIOSH/OSHA Department of Health and
Human Services (NIOSH) Publication 81-113;
January 1981; Supplement 1 (1988); Supplement 2
(1989).
12.
13.
14.
Occupational Safety and Health Guidance Manual
for Hazardous Waste Site Activities;
NIOSH/OSHA/USCG/EPA; U.S. Department of Heal th
and Human Services, Public Health Service,
Centers for Disease Control, NIOSH Publication
85-115; 1985.
Protecting Personnel at Hazardous Waste Sites;
Levine, S.P., Martin, W.F.; Butterworth-
Heinemann; 2nd Ed.; 1994.
Quick Selection Guide to Chemical
Clothing; 2nd Edition; Forsberg, K.,
S.Z.; Van Nostrand Reinhold; 1993.
Protective
Mansdorf,
\ \ llCtlSHO 3\ rROJEC':'~ \ PROJ\ 603 l 3 . I) I l \0 l l lO. dr,c 01160-3
a
0
u
m
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
•I
I
15. Standard Operating Safety Guides; USEPA Office
of Emergency and Remedial Response; OSWER
Directive 9285.1-03; 1992.
16. Threshold Limit Values and Biological Exposure
Indices for 1996; American Conference of
Governmental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH).
1. 03 PLAN DESCRIPTION
A. Contractor shall provide a Health and Safety Plan
(HASP) which establishes policies and procedures to
protect workers and the public from the potential
hazards posed by the work. The HASP must be
developed before site activities proceed.
1. At a minimum the plan shall:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Name key personnel and alternates responsible
for site safety and provide an o~ganizational
chart.
Describe
operation
hazards at
hazards associated
conducted, as well
the site.
with each
as general
Confirm that personnel are adequately trained
to perform their job responsibilities and to
handle the specific hazardous situations they
may encounter.
Describe the protective
equipment to be worn by
various site operations.
clothing and
personnel during
e. Describe medical surveillance requirements.
f.
g.
h.
i.
Describe the program for personnel
monitoring.
Describe the actions to be taken to mitigate
existing hazards to make the work environment
less hazardous.
Define site control measures and include a
site map depicting the work zones,
decontamination areas, and the location and
layout of any temporary facilities to be
constructed on or near the site.
Establish decontamination procedures (if
required) for personnel and equipment.
\ \ F1CN~HD3 \PROJECTS\ PROJ\ 603 l 3. O l l \ 0 1 11:0. doc 01160-4
I
I
D
I
I
I
I
I
I
j . Set forth the site's Standard Operating
Procedures for Health and Safety.
B. Definitions
As used in the HASP,
defined:
the following terms are
• Active Operations Activities
disturbance of waste, soil,
equipment at a work area.
resulting
buildings,
in
or
Authorized Personnel -Any person, such as task-
specific personnel, project personnel, oversight
personnel, contractors, and consultants whose
presence is authorized at the Project Site by
Owner.
Contamination Reduction Zone (CRZ) -The area or
corridor between the Exclusion Zone and the
Support Zone. This is the area where
decontamination takes place.
• Contractor/Subcontractor Any person
retained or hired by Contractor, to
and/or supervise any portion of the
conducted at the Project Site.
or firm,
carry out
activities
• Exclusion Zone -The area in which all personnel
entering must be directly involved in the ongoing
work, have designated personal protective
equipment (PPE), and meet training and medical
monitoring requirements. The exclusion zone will
be defined by an appropriate physical barrier,
which will be suitably marked.
Data Sheets, which provide
physical, ·chemical, and
of chemical compounds.
• MSDS -Material Safety
information on the
hazardous properties
Oversight Personnel -Any person, designated by
the State, Federal Government, or Owner, who is
assigned to carry out oversight work.
• PPM -Parts per million; expressed as PPM (v) for
gases and vapors.
Project Personnel Any person or contractor,
assigned by Owner, its consultants, its
contractors or subcontractors, to carry out work
at the Project Site (e.g., Project Director,
Project Manager, etc.).
\ \ BCNS1W 3\ PfiOJECT5 \ PR0,1\ 61lJ 13 . 0 11 \U 11 60. doc: 01160-5
D
I
D
e
0
0
D
D
0
D
0
0
0
0
I
0
g
I
• Project Health and Safety Officer The
designated person responsible for overall
implementation of the Health and Safety Plan.
Project Site
project Work
which access
field tasks
Plan.
-The area defined by a specific
Plan, as well as contiguous areas to
is required for the execution of the
which may be set forth in a Work
• Site Safety Officer -The person(s) designated by
Contractor who is responsible for supervising the
Health and Safety/Contingency Plan.
• Support Zone -The area outside the exclusion
zone that is considered clean for the purpose 0£
the Health and Safety/Contingency Plan. It is
used for transfer of equipment and materials
(i.e., support) into the secure area.
• Task-Specific Site Personnel Any person or
subcontractor assigned by Contractor to carry out
work at the Project site.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit plans in accordance with Section 01300.
B. In accordance with time frame outlined in Submittal
Schedule, Section 01340:
1. Written HASP containing all (applicable)
requirements under 29 CFR 1910.120. The plan
shall be written to avoid misinterpretation and
ambiguity, and to minimize the potential for
mistakes. Submit revised HASP, if required,
responding to comments by Owner, Owner's
Representative, or regulatory agencies, in
accordance with the Submittal Schedule.
2. HASP approvals by appropriate and qualified
Contractor personnel for review by Owner,
Owner's Representative, and by regulatory
agencies.
3. Documentation
required) .
4. Documentation
required) .
of
of
medical monitoring (as
personnel training (as
5. Documentation of personnel respirator
qualification and fit testing (as required).
\ \flCt/!:)l'J) \ rr<OJECTS\ Pl'OJ\ ~o 313 . 0 11 \ U 11 60 . doc 01160-6
D
0
0
u
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C. During Construction Activities:
1. All required forms and OSHA records will be
kept on site as applicable.
1.05 PRODUCT
A. Contractor shall provide a HASP consistent with the
recommended format as outlined in reference
No. B11, Occupational Safety and Heal th Guidance
Manual for Hazardous Waste Site Activities.
Minimum HASP requirements are described according
to the following sample outline:
i.
ii.
iii.
Table of Contents
Tables and Figures
Addenda
1.0 INTRODUCTION
1.1 Scope and Applicability of the HASP
A. Identify, evaluate, and control potential heal th,
safety and environmental hazards.
B. Provide emergency response provisions for accidents
during work operations.
1.2 Definition
A. To avoid misunderstanding
following items: ·
on site,
1. List of terms referenced in the HASP.
2. List of term definitions.
1.3 Visitor Requirements on Site
A. Visitors may periodically visit the
visitors must:
1. Be able to identify the
understand procedures.
secure
list
site.
zone
2. Know and follow sign in/sign out procedures.
the
The
and
3. Show documentation of appropriate training and
medical monitoring (as required) which is
required in secure work zones.
\ \ BCNa:lWJ \PROJECT:\ !•P.OJ\ 603 l 3. O 11 \ O 11 t>O . doc 01160-7
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.0 KEY PERSONNEL/IDENTIFICATION OF HEALTH AND SAFETY
PERSONNEL
A. Identify key personnel (and alternates) and
organizational responsibilities for site safety.
Also identify key personnel assigned to various
operations. List telephone numbers, addresses, and
organizations of these people. Include response
operations and governmental notification.
2.1 Key Personnel
A. List and define key project personnel on site and
off site. Include names, title, and off ice phone
number.
2.2 Site Specific Health and Safety Personnel
site
alternates.
number.
health
Include
and
name,
safety
title,
personnel and
and office phone
2.3 Organization Responsibilities
A. Specify minimum responsibilities of key project and
health and safety personnel ..
3.0 TASK/OPERATION SAFETY HEALTH RISK ANALYSIS
3.1 Historical Overview of Site
A. Include a site history.
B. Include a site map to provide
the geographical area.
an understanding of
C. Include plans showing the
any temporary facilities
near the site.
3.2 Task/Risk Analysis
location and layout
to be constructed on
of
or
A. Identify and evaluate any potential physical,
biological, radiological, or chemical hazards.
Express potential impact on workers or the public.
\ \BCNSHU3\PROJECT:.\Pl<.OJ\603 l J, 0 l l \01 l 60 .doc 01160-8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. Instructions
1. Identify chemical hazards including:
a. respirable dust
b. skin contact/absorption hazards
c. accidental ingestion
2. Iqentify electrical hazards including:
a. overhead electrical lines
b. buried electrical lines
c. de-energize electrical lines as required
3. Identify mechanical hazards including:
moving equipment and vehicles
rotating machine parts
a .
b.
c. lockout/tagout moving machinery, as req0ired
4. Identify fire/explosion hazards including:
a .
b.
c.
d.
e.
gasoline powered equipment
smoking
flammable fumes and vapors
burning and welding
compressed gases (e.g.,
compressed air)
natural gas,
5. Identify heat
including:
and cold stress hazards
a.
b.
extremely hot, humid weather
extremely cold, windy weather
6. Identify acoustical hazards including:
a. noisy equipment/machinery
7. Identify physical hazards including:
a. slippery or uneven walking surfaces
b. tripping hazards
c. working at elevations above floor level
8. Identify construction hazards:
a.
b.
c.
d.
confined space
trenching/shoring
site vehicle and heavy equipment tra£fic
overhead hazards
\ \BC!l!:",I10 1 \ PROJECT!:\ PP.OJ\ 60 313 . 0 11\011 60. d:;.c 01160-9
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
9. Identify hazards relating to off-site
locations:
a. migration of dusts/fumes/mists or
unanticipated releases to protect the
adjacent community and general public
b. off-site vehicular traffic
10. Identify unanticipated hazards.
4.0 PERSONNEL TRAINING REQUIREMENTS
4.1 Training and Briefing Topics
A. Pre-project briefing meeting covering the following
HASP topics:
site characterization
hazards
i .
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
medical surveillance requirements
symptoms of overexposure to hazards
site control
training requirements
monitoring equipment
B. Have all site workers sign an acknowledgment form
attesting to attendance at the pre-project meeting,
understanding of safety rules and documentation and
understanding of respirator fit test (as
necessary) .
C. Hold a daily
designated site
current safety
reminder.
safety meeting
safety officer
issues and
to
to
as
be held by the
discuss specific
a daily safety
D. Have all site workers supply documentation of
appropriate training.
1. Suggested topics to be covered:
a. personal protective equipment
b. hazards
c. any injuries or close calls
d. weather related issues
5.0 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT TO BE USED
A. Define levels of protection required for work
activities in terms of work location and/ or work
function. Define specific types of respirators and
protective clothing for each level.
\ \BCNSllO 3 \PROJECT!,\ PPOJ\ 60313 . 011 \ 0 l l 60. doc 01160-10
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
5.1 to 5.5 Level A, B, C and D ~ersonal Protective
Equipment
A. After review of hazards and the greatest expected
exposure, select levels A-D personal protective
equipment. Due to the identified contaminants,
level A is not likely to be required. Describe
levels of protection worn by personnel and
delineate specific job functions.
5 .1 Level A
respiratory,
needed.
worn when the
skin, and
highest level
eye protection
of
is
5.2 Level B worn when the highest level of
respiratory protection is needed, but a lesser
level of skin protection.
5.3 Level C -worn when the criteria for using air-
purifying respirators are met based on toxins
and/or air monitoring results.
5.4 Level D -worn only as work uniform and not on
any site with respiratory or skin hazards.
5.5 The level of protection is selected based on:
Type and measured concentration of the chemical
substances in the ambient atmosphere and their
toxicity.
Potential for exposure to substances
splashes of liquids, or other direct
with material due to work being done.
5.6 Reassessment of Protection Program
in air,
contact
A. Levels of protection shall be upgraded or
downgraded based upon changes in site conditions or
later findings.
5.7 Work Mission Duration
A. The anticipated duration of the work mission is
established.
B. Conditions that affect work mission duration to be
addressed in this section are:
a. cold and heat
b. capacity to work in full face respirators
c. air supply consumption of SCBAs or airline
respirators
\ \BCNSHllJ \PROJECTS\ Pf'.OJ\ 60 3 I 3 . O 11 \0 I l 60. doc 01160-11
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I'
,I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
5.8 Chemical
Material
Resistance and Integrity of Protective
A. Personal protective equipment must be specific for
the tasks performed in the HASP.
8. The Quick Selection Guide to Chemical Protective
Clothing provides a quick reference.
5.9 Standard Operating
Protection Devices
Procedures for Respiratory
A. Checklists for pre-use inspection, reinspection,
and periodic inspection.
5.10 Standard Operating Procedures for Personal
Protective Clothing
A. Checklists
reinspections.
for pre-use inspection and
5.11 Specific Levels of Protection for Site
A. Based on anticipated hazards, the specific levels
of protection are listed.
1. Level A
2. Level 8
3. Level C
4. Level D (or Modified Level D)
8. List all types of personal protective equipment to
be used on site for each level.
6.0 MEDICAL SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.· Develop a medical surveillance
Certified or Qualified to be
Occupational Physician.
program by a Board
a Board Certified
6.1 Baseline or Pre-assignment Monitoring
A. Document medical moni taring
working in the Secure Zone.
B. Examinations to include:
for all personnel
a. complete medical and work histories
b. physical examination
c. pulmonary function
d. chest X-ray
e. electrocardiogram
f. eye exam and visual acuity
g. audiometry
\ \BCNSl!fJJ \ Pl<OJE:CtS \ Pf/.OJ\ 6031 J. 011\011 60. doc 01160-12
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
h. urinalysis
i. blood chemistry (hematology,
heavy metals toxicology)
serum. analyses,
C. The medical monitoring physical must certify the
ability of personnel to use air-purifying
respirators and to be medically able to perform
specific tasks.
6.2 Periodic Monitoring
A. Perform periodic monitoring
personnel working in the
within the last 12 months.
(medical physical) for
secure zone required
B. Monitoring documentation maintained on Site.
6.3 Specific Medical Monitoring
A. Monitoring for symptoms related to the possible
exposure of harmful chemical compounds.
B. Physical injuries during
covered by HASP.
C. Visually monitor personnel
cold overexposure.
6.4 Exposure/Injury/Medical Support
performance
for signs
of tasks
of heat or
A. Make provisions for special circumstances which may
require medical attention of a physician.
7. 0 FREQUENCY AND TYPES OF AIR MONITORING AND PERSONNEL
AIR SAMPLING
A. The purpose is to identify and quantify airborne
contaminants in order to verify and determine the
level of personal protection required and to ensure
non-migration of site contaminants to off-site
locations.
B. Two principal methods are used:
a. Continuous air monitoring using direct reading
instrument, (e.g. HNU, OVA, combustible
gas/oxygen meter, dust monitors.)
b. Composite air monitoring obtained by sorbent
(e.g. charcoal and silica gel tubes collected by
a personal pump).
\ \ acN:;HOJ \ PROJECTS\ PROJ\ GOJ 1 3.011 \0 l : ir1 , doc 01160-13
I
I
I
I
a
D
u
B
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
7.1 Direct-Reading Monitoring Instruments
A. Direct Reading Instruments are used in the Secure
Zone.
B. Determine Direct Reading Instrument
anticipated contaminants and confined
requirements.
C. Calibrate instruments each morning
afternoon.
7.2 Personal Sampling
based on
space entry
and each
A. Based on contaminants, identify personal sampling
pumps with collection tubes that may be used.
7. 3 Specific Contaminants that may be Monitored at Site
Location
A. Contaminants of concern include the following:
\ \llCNSlf/13\PROJE:CT.S\!'f'0.1\ 60313. 011 \(J l l io. doc 01160-14
I
I
I
I
I
D
I
II
0
D
B
I
D
I
m
I
I
Concentration
Constituent Media mg/L mg/kg
1,2-DCE (cis & SL, GW 0.87 0.0245
trans}
Ethylbenzene SL 1 . 8
PCE SL, GW 0.388 4.5-5
Toluene SL, GW 0.067
TCE SL, GW 0.063 0.044
Xylenes (TOT} SL 0.0082 15
1,1-DCA GW 0.36
1,1-DCE GW 0.076
1,1,1-TCA GW 0.13 0.002
1,2-dichloropropane GW 0.0175
Carbon GW 0.065
PAHs SL 210
Pesticides GW 0.013 318
Heftachlorepoxide GW 0.000084 0.063
Al SL, GW 54 42,000
As SL, GW 11
Ba SL, GW 0.5 510
Ca SL, GW 30 170,000
Co SL, GW 0.52 110
Pb SL, GW 0.061 3,500
Mg SL, GW 11 23,000
Mn SL, SW 2.4 3,100
Hg SL, GW 0.0007 5.7
K SL, GW 0.2 13,000
Zn SL, GW 0.24 3, 90 0
Cr GW 0.084 1,200
Cu GW 0.059 900
Fe GW 110 99,000
Se GW 6.3
Ni GW 0.06 120
Na GW 70 680
V GW 0.099 330
SL soil
GW groundwater
Note: In addition to the constituents listed above, there
is a potential to encounter organic subsurface dense
nonaqueous phase liquids (DNAPL} at the site.
Greater amounts of these substances may be present in
environmental materials in the work areas.
\ \BCt1SU03\PROJECT:;\ppc,J\ 60313. OJ l \0 11 60. doc 01160-'15
I
I
I
I
I
I
•
I
I
I
g
D
D
ff
u
I
D
8.0 SITE CONTROL MEASURES
8.1 Buddy System
A. Work in the Secure Zone shall be scheduled to
assure no person works alone.
B. Visual contact shall be maintained at all times.
C; Buddy system shall be required when working on or
near water hazards including the use of a life line
and life preservers.
D. Appropriate trained personnel (authorized entrants,
attendants, entry supervisors, and rescue and
emergency services) for permit-required confined
space.
8.2 Site Communications Plan
A. Provide a communication system which includes the
following elements.
1. telephones
2. 2-way radios
3. hand signals
4. verbal communication
5. other (horns, whistles)
8.3 Work Zone Definition and Site Access
A. Work zone definition incorporates the following
elements (as required)
1. Exclusion Zone
2. Secure Zone
3. Contamination Reduction Zone
4. Support Zone
5. Control procedures to prevent unauthorized
access. Require a check-in and check-out
system to control and record each indi victual
and piece of equipment in each area.
6. Site security procedures -(fences, signs, sign
in/sign out procedures)
\ \Bc11:;110 3 \ rl'.OJECTS \ PROJ\ r,o 3 13 . (J 11\011 f,rJ . due 01160-16
I
I
I
n
n
8
D
D
D
B. Provide a site map and identify the following (as
necessary)
1. Exclusion zone, Secure Zone, Contamination
Reduction Zone, and Support Zone.
2. Indicate the sizes of zones, zone boundaries,
and access control points into each zone.
3. Indicate the location of nearest roads, major
topographical features, and other buildings.
8.4 Nearest Medical Assistance
A. Provide the name, address, and telephone of nearest
medical assistance and location of on site medical
assistance (if appropriate).
B. Provide a map to nearest medical facility.
C. Provide written
facility.
8.5 Safe Work Practices
directions to nearest medical
A. List safe work practices that are mandatory and
enforceable at site location
8.6 Emergency Alarm Procedure
Address site emergencies or occurrences that require
immediate actions to prevent additional problems or
harm to responders, the public, property, or the
environment.
A. Establish Site Emergency Procedures:
1. List names and emergency functions of
personnel responsibl~ for emergency
Indicate training they have received.
on-site
actions.
2. Provide communication plan and alternate means
for emergency communications.
3. List names, telephone numbers, and locations of
emergency organizations that might be needed.
4. Address and define procedures
evacuation of personnel.
5. List emergency equipment.
6. Address emergency medical care.
\ \BCl/5lJ(l)\ PROJEC7 S ·, ?ROJ\ 603 I 3. 0 l l \ 0 l 160 . doc 01160-17
for rapid
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
7. Advise site personnel of their duties in an
emergency.
8. Provide for emergency
injured personnel.
decontamination of
9. Provide a map ( s) with route ( s) to nearby
hospital ( s) and pre-arrangements for emergency
medical treatment.
10. Notify and coordinate with local emergency and
rescue services before commencing permit
required confined space entries.
9.0 DECONTAMINATION PLAN
9.1 Standard Operating Procedures
A. Establish decontamination procedures (as required)
for personnel and equipment. ··
B. Arrange
material,
for proper disposal of
solutions, and equipment.
contaminated
Follow specifics as stated in Occupational Safety and
Health Guidance Manual for Hazardous Waste Site
Activities. NIOSH/OSHA/USCG/EPA; US Department of
Health and Human Services, Public Health Service,
Center for Disease Control, NIOSH; 1985.
9.2 Levels of Decontamination Protection Required for
Personnel
A. Establish the level of decontamination based on
anticipated levels of contaminants.
9.3 Equipment Decontamination
A. Establish decontamination procedures for equipment
and arrange for disposal of solutions and/or
equipment in accordance with the Construction
Operations Plan.
9.4 Disposition of Decontamination Wastes
A. Establish
procedures.
equipment.
\ \l:!CNf,IIUJ\['RO,H:cr: .f fl(>,J\60] l J. Ol 1\0111,<J, doc
decontamination
This includes
01160-18
waste
solutions
disposal
and/or
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
10.0 EMERGENCY RESPONSE/CONTINGENCY PLAN
A. Provide an Emergency Response/Contingency
established with the following objectives:
1. Pre-Emergency Planning
2. Personnel Roles and Lines of Authority
3. Emergency Recognition and Prevention
Plan
4. Evacuation Routes and Procedures/Safe Distances
5. Site Security and Control
6. Emergency Decontamination Procedures
7. Emergency Contact/Notification System and
Alerting Procedures including alternate means
of communication
8. Emergency Medical Treatment Procedures
9. Fire or Explosion Response Procedures
10. Spill or Leak Response Procedures
11. Personal Protective Equipment and Emergency
Equipment
12. Rescue and Emergency Services
13. Governmental Notification Procedures
11.0 SPILL CONTAINMENT PROGRAM
A. Provide a spill containment program identifying
possible spill potential and containment procedures
and equipment.
1. List emergency contacts and phone numbers
2. List types and location of spill containment
materials.
12.0 CONFINED SPACE ENTRY PROGRAM
A. Provide a confined space entry program identifying
locations of confined spaces, potential hazards
present within these spaces, personnel notification
procedures, and ways to limit access into confined
spaces.
\ \ IJCNSIW 3 \PROJECTS\ PFWJ\ Gtl.1 l J O l l \(I I I GO, doc 01160-19
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1,
I
I
I
I
I'
B. Describe established permit-required confined space
entry procedures that meet the following objectives
found in 29 CFR 1910.146:
1. Applicability of this procedure
2. Definitions used in this procedure
3. General requirements
4. Contractor notification requirements
5. Methods to limit access to spaces, control and
isolate hazards, evaluate acceptable entry
conditions through testing to determine if
acceptable entry conditions exist and are
maintained . during the course of entry
conditions
6. Required personal protective equipment
7. Equipment calibration, air monitoring and ventilation
procedures
8. Document completion of measures
program through the use of
permits
required
written,
9. Establish and document personnel training
in the
signed
10. Provide description of duties for entry, rescue, and
support personnel
11. Describe rescue operations and equipment
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 -EXECUTION
NOT USED
\ \ l1i.tl;,11n 3 \ l'ROJECT'.: \ PROJ\ GO JI) . 011\011 CO. doc
[END OF SECTION]
01160-20
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 01200
PROJECT MEETINGS AND ADMINISTRATION
PART 1 -GENERAL
1. 01 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING
A. Owner shall schedule a pre-construction meeting at the
Pr6ject Site or other convenient location prior to
commencement of construction activities. Meeting shall
be conducted to review responsibilities and personnel
assignments.
B. Attendees: The Owner, Engineer, Owner's Representative,
Contractor and his superintendent, major subcontractors,
manufacturers, suppliers, Surveyor, and other concerned
parties shall each be represented at meeting by persons
familiar with, and authorized to, conclude matters
relating to Work.
C. Agenda: The agenda for meeting should include i terns of
significance that could affect progress including:
1. Construction schedule;
Critical Work sequencing;
Designation of responsible personnel;
2 .
3 .
4 . Construction Quality Assurance (CQA) procedures and
protocols;
5 . Procedures for processing field decisions and Change
Orders;
6.
7.
8 .
Procedures for processing Applications for Payment;
Distribution of Contract Documents;
Submittal
samples;
of shop drawings,
9. Preparation of record documents;
10. Use of the premises;
11. Office, Work, and storage areas;
product data,
12. Equipment deliveries and priorities;
13. General Construction Safety procedures;
\ \BCNSHOJ \ PHflJECTS \ P~G,J \ r,o 31J.011 \ 0 l 200. doc 01200-1
and
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
14. Site Health and Safety Plan;
15. First aid;
16. Security;
17. Housekeeping; and
18. Working hours.
1. 02 PROGRESS MEETINGS
A. Progress meetings will be held at Project Site at least
every month. Owner shall notify Contractor, Engineer,
and Owner's Representative of scheduled meeting dates.
B. Attendees: Owner's Representative, in addition to
representatives of Owner, Engineer, and Contractor, each
subcontractor, supplier, or other entity concerned with
current progress or involved in planning, coordination,
or performance of future activities shall be represented
at these meetings by persons familiar with the project
and authorized to conclude matters relating to progress.
C. Reporting: Owner's Representative shall be responsible
for preparing progress meeting report no later than
three working days after each progress meeting date;
copies shall be distributed to each party present and to
other parties as appropriate. A brief summary, in
narrative form, of progress since previous meeting shall
be included in report.
1. 03 PROBLEM OR WORK DEFICIENCY MEETING
A. A special meeting shall be held when and if a problem or
deficiency is present or anticipated. At a minimum,
meeting shall be attended by Engineer, Owner's
Representative, Contractor, and any affected
Subcontractors. Purpose of meeting shall be to define
and resolve problem or deficiency.
B. Meeting shall be documented by Owner's Representative
and minutes shall be transmitted to affected parties.
1.04 ADMINISTRATION OF CONTRACT
A. Contractor shall follow Drawings strictly and execute
all Work in accordance therewith, and with the kind and
quality of materials set forth in . the Specifications,
using the figured dimensions marked on Drawings and not
scaled measurements.
B. Specifications and Drawings shall be coordinated, so
that any work shown on the Drawings and not mentioned in
\ \P.CU:;HO) \ l'f\0,JECT5 \ PROJ\ 60 31) , 0 11\01200. doc 01200-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
the Specifications, and vice-versa, shall be executed in
the same manner as though mentioned in the
Specifications and shown in the Drawings.
C. Contractor shall furnish and install such Work and
material as may be proper and suitable which is shown or
specified, whether or not the same as specifically
mentioned in the Specifications or shown on the
Drawings. The Contractor shall be required to make
plural and complete work which is shown single or
partially indicated to avoid needless repetition, for
the sake of brevity, and for reasons of clarity. In all
cases, the intent and meaning of the Drawings and
Specifications, as defined herein, shall be followed.
The Contractor shall not avail himself of any errors or
omissions therein, should any exist, which may be in
conflict therewith. If there is any question as to the
true intent of the Contract Documents, the judgment of
the Engineer shall be final.
1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Contractor shall maintain at jobsite one copy of all
Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, approved Shop
Drawings, Change Orders, Field Orders, other Contract
Modifications, Record Drawings Documentation, and other
approved documents submitted in compliance with various
sections of these Specifications.
B. Identification and Maintenance: Each Project Record
Document shall be clearly marked ''Project Record Copy'',
maintained in good condition, available at all times for
inspection by Engineer or Owner's Representative, and
not used for construction purposes.
C. Records:
1. Mark up most appropriate Document to show:
2 •
a.
b.
a.
Significant
process .
changes made during construction
. Significant detail not shown in original Contract
Documents.
Information given shall include, but shall. not be
limited to:
Location of
appurtenances,
improvements.
underground
referenced to
utilities and
permanent surface
b. Location of internal utilities and appurtenances,
referenced to permanent surface improvements.
\ \hC:r!SHOJ \ P){(JJECTS\ PP.OJ'. 60) l ) . 0 l l \01 2 fJO . doc 01200-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'I-
I,
I
I
I
c. Any relocation of concealed structural components.
d. Other changes as directed by Engineer or Owner's
Representative.
3 . Keep Project Record Documents
permanently conceal any Work
information has been recorded.
current.
until
Do not
required
4. Project Record Documents kept on jobsite and amended
as changes occur shall be returned to Engineer as
part of project record information submission.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART.3 -EXECUTION
NOT USED
\ \ rin1:;uo J \ rRo,H:CT~ \ PROJ \ ,;r, 11 J . 0 l l \ 0 l 2 00. due
[END OF SECTION]
01200-4
I
I
SECTION 01300
I SUBMITTALS
'I PART 1 -GENERAL
I·
I
I·
I
I
I,
I
I
I
'I
I
I
I
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Submittals covered by these requirements include
manufacturers' information, shop drawings, test
procedures, test results, samples, requests for
substitutions, and miscellaneous work-related submittals.
Submittals shall also include, but not be limited to, all
mechanical, electrical and electronic equipment and
systems, materials, reinforcing steel, fabricated i terns,
and piping and conduit details. Contractor shall furnish
all drawings, specifications, descriptive data,
certificates, samples, tests, methods, schedules, and
manufacturer's installation and other instructions as
specifically required in Contract Documents to
demonstrate fully that materials and equipment to be
furnished and methods of Work comply with the provisions
and intent of the Contract Documents.
B. Submittals specified for this project are listed in
Section 01340.
1. 02 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Contractor shall be responsible for accuracy and
completeness of information contained in each submittal
and shall assure that material, equipment or method of
work shall be as described in the submittal. Contractor
shall verify that all features of all products conform to
specified requirements. Submittal documents shall be
clearly edited to indicate only those items, models, or
series of equipment, which are being submitted for
review. All extraneous materials shall be crossed out or
otherwise obliterated. The Contractor shall ensure that
there is no conflict with other submittals and notify
Owner's Representative in each case where his submittal
may affect Work of another contractor or Owner.
Contractor shall coordinate submittals among his
subcontractors and suppliers.
8. Contractor shall coordinate submittals with Work so that
Work will not be delayed. Contractor shall coordinate
and schedule different categories of submit tals, so that
one will not be delayed for lack of coordination with
another. No extension of time will be allowed because of
failure to properly schedule submittals. Contractor
\ \ 8CNSHU J \ r!m,H:CTS \ PROJ \ r,r1J 1 J O l l \ U 1 )Qr1. doc 01300-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
g
D
I
I
I
work related to a
complete. This
and comment shall
submittal until
requires that
be returned to
shall not proceed with
submittal process is
submittals for review
Contractor stamped
Corrections Noted.''
"No Exceptions Taken" or "Make
C. Contractor shall certify on each submittal document that
he has reviewed submittal, verified field conditions, and
complied with contract documents.
D. Contractor may authorize in writing a material or
equipment supplier to deal directly with Owner's
Representative or with Owner with regard to a submittal.
These dealings shall be limited to contract
interpretations to clarify and expedite Work.
1.03 CATEGORIES OF SUBMITTAL$
1.04
A. Submittals fall into two general categories:
1. Submittals for review and comment
2. Submittals which are for information only.
Submittals which are for information only are
generally specified as PRODUCT DATA in Part 2 of
applicable specification sections.
B. Submittals for review and comment: All submittals except
where specified to be submitted as product data for
information only shall be submitted by Contractor to
Owner's Representative for review and comment.
C. Submi ttals ( Product Data) for information only: Where
specified, Contractor shall furnish submittals (product
data) to Owner's Representative for information only.
TRANSMITTAL PROCEDURE
A. Unless otherwise specified, submittals regarding material
and equipment shall be accompanied by Transmittal Form
01300-A. A separate transmittal Form shall be used for
each specific i tern, class of material, equipment, and
items specified in separate, discrete sections, for which
the submittal is required. Submittal documents common to
more than one piece of equipment shall be identified with
all the appropriate equipment numbers. Submi ttals for
various. items shall be made with a single form when the
items taken together constitute a manufacturer's package
or are so functionally related that expediency indicates
checking or review of the group or package as a whole.
\ \ !ICN!;HOJ \ PRO,JECT$ \ PROJ \ 6CJ 3 I J . 0 11 \ IJ I ]IHI. d"c 01300-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A unique number, sequentially assigned, shall be noted on
Transmittal Form accompanying each item submitted.
Original submittal numbers shall have following format:
"XXX"; where "XXX" is sequential number assigned by
Contractor. Resubmi ttals shall have following format:
''XXX-Y''; where ''XXX'' is originally assigned submittal
number and "Y" is a sequential letter assigned for
resubmittals (i.e., A, B, or C being the 1st, .2nd, and
3rd resubmit tals, respectively) . Submittal 25B, for
example, is the second resubmittal of submittal 25.
B. Deviation from Contract: If the Contractor proposes to
provide material, equipment, or method of work that
deviates from Specifications, Contractor shall indicate
so under "deviations" on Transmittal Form accompanying
submittal copies.
C. Submittal Completeness:
information required
deviations, are not
without review.
Submittals which do not have all
to be submitted, including
acceptable and will be returned
I 1 . 05. REVIEW PROCEDURE
I
g
0
D
I
I
I
I
A. General: Submittals are specified for those features
and characteristics of materials, equipment, and methods
of operation which can be selected based on the
Contractor's judgment of their conformance to specified
requirements. Other features and characteristics are
specified in a manner which enables Contractor to
determine acceptable options without submittals. Review
procedure is based on Contractor's guarantee that all
features and characteristics not requiring submittals
conform as specified. Review shall not extend to means,
methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of
construction, or to verifying quantities, dimensions,
weights or gages, or fabrication processes (except where
specifically indicated or required by Specifications) or
to safety precautions or programs incident thereto.
Review of a separate i tern, as such, will not indicate
approval of the assembly in which item functions.
B. Submittals for Review and Comment: Contractor shall
submit to Engineer three (3) copies of submittal for
acceptance. One (1) additional copy shall be sent
directly to Owner. At time of submission, the Contractor
shall call to Engineer's attention, in writing, any
deviations that shop drawings may have from requirements
of the Drawings and Specifications. Shop drawings for a
particular component shall be submitted complete at least
14 days prior to anticipated start date of construction
unless an alternative schedule is given elsewhere in
\ \hCN5Hll 3 \ rRo,/ECT5 \ rROJ\ 6tJ J l 3 . 0 11 \0 l )flfl. doc 01300-3
D
I
•
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Specifications. Shop drawings will be reviewed and
returned within 10 business days unless otherwise
indicated. The returned submittal shall indicate one of
the following actions:
1. If submittal review indicates· that the material,
equipment or work method complies with
Specifications, submittal copies will be marked "NO
EXCEPTIONS TAKEN." In this event, Contractor may
begin Work method or incorporate material or
equipment covered by submittal.
2. If submittal review indicates limited corrections are
required, copies will be marked "MAKE CORRECTIONS
NOTED." Contractor may begin Work method or
incorporating material and equipment covered by
submittal in accordance with noted corrections.
Where submittal information will be incorporated in
O&M data, Contractor shall provide a corrected copy.
3. If submittal review reveals that submittal is
insufficient or contains incorrect data, copies will
be marked· "AMEND AND RESUBMIT." Except at
Contractor's own risk, Contractor shall not undertake
Work covered by this submittal until it has been
revised, resubmitted and returned marked either "NO
EXCEPTIONS TAKEN'' or ''MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED.''
4. If submittal review indicates that material,
equipment, or Work method does not comply with
Specifications, copies of submittal will be marked
''REJECTED -SEE REMARKS.'' Submittals with deviations
which have not been identified clearly may be
rejected. Except at Contractor's own risk,
Contractor shall not undertake Work covered by such
submittals until a new submittal is made and returned
marked either "NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN" or "MAKE
CORRECTIONS NOTED."
C. Submittals (Product Data) for Information Only: Such
information is not subject to submittal review
procedures and shall be provided as part of Work under
this contract and its acceptability determined under
normal inspection procedures.
1 . 0 6 EFFECT OF REVIEW OF CONTRACTOR' S SUBMITTALS
A. Review of Drawings, methods of Work, or information
regarding materials or equipment the Contractor proposes
to provide, shall not relieve Contractor of
responsibility for errors therein and shall not be
regarded as an assumption of risks or liability by
\ \RCN<,IIU 3 \PROJECTS\ PIWJ \ 60 3 I) . 0 11 \CJ 1 300 . ctuc 01300-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Engineer, ·owner's Representative or Owner, or by any
officer or employee thereof, and Contractor shall have no
claim under the contract on account of failure, or
partial failure, of method of Work, material, or
equipment so reviewed. A mark of "NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN"
or "MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED" shall mean that Owner has no
objection to Contractor, upon his own responsibility,
using plan or method of Work proposed, or providing
materials or equipment proposed.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 -EXECUTION
NOT USED
\ \llCtl~llO) \Pl'.0.1 r:c7~ \ PROJ \ f,QJ 13 . 0 11 \U l 300 . doc
[END OF SECTION]
01300-5
B
I
E
I
I
I
I
01300-A. SUBMITTAL TRANSMITTAL FORM:
SUBMITTAL TRANSMITT
Submittal Description: --------'------------------Submittal No: 1
Spec Section:
Routing Sent Received
OWNER: Contractor/CM
PROJECT: CM/Engineer
Engineer/CM
CONTRACTOR: CM/Contractor
We are sending you □Attached □Under separate cover via ________ .
□Submittals for review and comment
□Product data for information only
Remarks:
Review
Section Review Reviewer comments
Item Copies Date No. Description action" initials attached
"Note: NET= No cxrcptions taken; MCN = Make corrections noted; A&R = Amend and resubmit; R"" Rejected Attach additional sheets if necessary.
Contractor
Certify either A or B:
□A. We have verified that the material or equipment contained in this submittal meets all the requirements, including
coordination with all related work, specified (no exceptions).
DB. We have verified that the material or equipment contained in this submittal meets all the requirements specified
except for the attached deviations.
No. Deviation
Certified by:--------------------------------
Contractor's Signature
1 See paragraph 0 1300-1.04, Transmittal Procedure.
D
fl
D
n
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 01310
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE
PART 1 -GENERAL
1. 01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Construction Progress Schedule
1. 02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01040 -Project Coordination
B. Section 01340 -Submittal Schedule
1. 03 SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor shall develop and submit Construction
Progress Schedule in accordance with this Specification
section.
B. Construction Progress Schedule must be approved by Owner
before Site activities proceed.
C. Submit details of Construction Progress Schedule for
each individual work activity including but not limited
to:
1. Mobilization
2. Site Preparation/Control
3. Well Installation
4. Piping Installation
5. Package System Installation
6. Electrical and Controls
7. System Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
8. Meetings
9. Substantial Completion
10. Final Inspection/Punchlist
11. Demobilization
1.04 DESCRIPTION
A. Construction Progress Schedule shall include,
minimum, the following:
at a
1. Critical milestones on activity progression schedule
(modification, selection and purchasing, excavation,
assembly, construction, start-up, turnover).
2. Coordination with Owner or Owner's Representative
for critical path identification and implementation.
\ \BCNSJIOJ \ PROJECTS \PROJ \ 1;0] l J. 011 \0 l 3 l O. doc 01310-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3. Follow standards as stated in AIA guidelines for a
Gantt chart progress schedule.
4. Use Microsoft Project software for Construction
Progress Schedule.
B. Contractor shall update Construction Progress Schedule
as appropriate, but no less than monthly.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 -EXECUTION
NOT USED
\ \ BCNS 1!03 \ PHO,JECTS \ ppr)J\ ~o 313 , 0 I I \0 1 310. doc:
[END OF SECTION)
01310-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 01340
SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE
PART 1 -GENERAL
1. 01
Section
No.
01035
01050
01160
01310
01370
01380
01540
01660
01700
SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
Submittal
Name of Change Order
Coordinator for Contractor
Surveyor Contact Information
Survey Plan
Certified Drawings
Written Health and Safety
Plan
Construction Progress
Schedule
Schedule of Values
Construction Photographs
Security Protocol
System Compliance Report
Written Certification of
Project Completion
\ \f\CN:iH03\ l'R0JF.CT:i\PP.0 J\6'; 11). 011 \l!l J41J. doc 01340-1
Described
In
1.03A
1.04A
1.048
l.04C-E
1. 04
1.03
1. 03
1. 04
1. 04
1. 03
1.01
Submit When
10 DPSC
10 DPSC
14 days after
completion and
14 days after
review
10 DAAC
Monthly, at a
minimum
10 DPSC
14 days after
exposure
10 DPSC
14 days after
completion of
testing
Prior to
project
closeout
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section
No. Submittal
01730 Preliminary Draft of O&M
Instructions
Equipment O&M Documents
Completed O&M Documents
Final O&M Documents, Spare
Parts List
02070 Detailed Demolition
Procedures
02220 Compaction Equipment
Information, Pipe Bedding
Information
Conformance Analysis
02444 Shop Drawings
02672 Driller Qualifications, Well
Material Information and
Drawings
05120 Manufacturer's Information
and Shop Drawings
08331 Product Data, Drawings, and
Instructions
r: \PROJ\60313, 011 \01 340, doc 01340-2
Described
In Submit When
1.06A 10 DPSC
1.06B 10 days after
acceptance
1.06C 14 days prior
to final
inspection
1.06D,E
1.03
1.0SA,B
l.0SC
1.02
1. 03
1. 03
1.03
10 days after
final
inspection
14 DPSC
10 DPSC
10 days after
completion
14 DPI
10 DPSC
10 DPI
10 DPI
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section
No. Submittal
11500 Engineering Design and Shop
Drawings
Manufacturer's Experience
O&M Manuals, Certification,
Guarantee, and Warranty
Manufacturer's Reports,
Field Test Results
15060 Shop Drawings, Experience
Field Test Results,
Manufacturer's Reports,
O&M Manuals, Guarantee, and
Warranty
15140 Manufacturer's Product Data
15260 Plan, Manufacturer's
Information, Contractor
References
15481
Guarantee
Engineering Design and Shop
Drawings
Manufacturer's Experience
O&M Manuals, Certification,
Guarantee, and Warranty
Manufacturer's Reports,
Field Test Results
\ \!ICNSH03\PROJECTS\PP'.lJ\ 60313. 011 \(,1340. doc 01340-3
Described
In Submit When
l.04A,B 14 DPI
1.04G 14 DPSC
l.04E,F,H With product
shipment
l.04D,C 10 days after
completion
l.03A,B 10 DPI
1. 03C-F 10 days after
each
completion
1.03 10 DPI
l.03A-C,E 10 DPI
1.03D 10 days after
completion
l.04A,B 14 DPI
1.04G 14 DPSC
l.04E,F,H With product
shipment
l.04D,C 10 days after
completion
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
0
u
Section
No. Submittal
15489 Engineering Design and Shop
Drawings
Manufacturer's E~perience
O&M Manuals, Certification,
Guarantee, and Warranty
Manufacturer's Reports,
Field Test Results
16010 Shop Drawings, Equipment
Layout, Y2K Compliance
Certification, O&M Manuals
16121 Data Sheets
16134 Product Data
16140 Product Data
16141 Product Data
16170 Product Data
16480 Product Data
16900 Shop Drawings, Spare Parts
List, Guarantee
Field Test Results,
Manufacturer's Reports
Prior to Installation.
Described
In Submit When
l.04A,B 14 DPI
1.04G 14 DPSC
l.04E,F,H With product
shipment
l.04D,C 10 days after
completion
l.04B-D 10 DPI
1.05
1.02 10 DPI
1.02 10 DPI
1.02 10 DPI
1.03 10 DPI
1.02 10 DPI
1.03 10 DPI
l.03A,E,D 10 DPI
l.03B,C
DPI
DPSC
DAAC
= Days
= Days
Days
Prior to Start of Construction.
After Award of Contract.
[END OF SECTION]
\ \BCNSHOJ\rROJECTS\ff"')J\G()) 13. 011 \013~0. d,,,: 01340-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 01370
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Schedule of Values Form as described herein.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 00310 -Bid Form
B. Section 01027 -Applications for Payment
1. 03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit to Owner a Contractor's Schedule of Values
allocated to various portions of Work bid as Lump
Sum.
1. A preliminary Contractor's Schedule of Values
to include units, quantity, and unit prices
shall be submitted to Owner with Bid for Lump
Sum items. Unit prices provided by Contractor
for Work items on Schedule of Values shall be
used if additional Work in addition to bid
quantity estimated is required. Schedule of
Values shall include specifically items
associated with air sparging, soil vapor
extraction, and off-gas treatment systems.
2 . After review by Owner, final
Schedule of· Values shall be
submitted to Owner.
Contractor's
prepared and
B. Upon request
values with
correctness.
of Owner,
data which
Contractor shall support
will substantiate their
1.04 FORM AND CONTENT OF SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Type schedule on 8½ x 11-inch white paper;
Contractor's standard forms and automated printout
will be considered for approval by Owner upon
Contractor's request. Identify schedule with:
1. Title and location of project.
2. Owner and Owner's project number.
3. Name and address of Contractor.
P: \Pll0J\603 13. 011\01370, doc 01370-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
4. Contiact designation.
5. Date of submission.
B. List on Schedule installed value of component parts
of Work in sufficient detail to serve as basis for
computing values for progress payments during
construction.
C. Follow table of contents of these Specifications as
format for listing component items.
1. Identify each line item with number and title
of respective major sections of Specifications.
D. For each major line item, list sub-values of major
products or operations under item.
of items of General
such as but not limited
E. Provide separate listing
Requirements (Division 1),
to: mobilization, field
construction facilities
contingency allowance,
submittals.
supervision and layout,
and temporary controls,
construction schedule, and
F. For various portions of Work:
1. Each i tern shall include directly proportional
amount of Contractor's overhead and profit.
2 . For items
requested
into:
on which progress payments will be
for stored materials, subdivide value
a. Cost of materials, delivered and unloaded,
with taxes paid.
b. Total installed value.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 -EXECUTION
NOT USED
P:\PROJ\60313.0ll\01370.doc
[END OF SECTION]
01370-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
m
I
D
0
0
0
SECTION 01380
CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1. 01 SUMMARY
A. Contractor shall provide all labor,
film, album, and labels necessary· to
documentation requirements. This cost
in the contract bid price.
camera, tripods,
meet photographic
shall be included
B. Photographic documentation shall consist of photographs
of each major construction component at various
milestone posts of construction as defined herein or as
directed by Owner's Representative.
C. Photographs
prior to
appearance
completion
shall include important
construction, construction
of individual subject
of Work.
features of Site
activities, and
areas following
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
·A.Section 01300 -Submittals
1.03 PHOTOGRAPHIC REQUIREMENTS
A. Photographs shall be taken with quality 35 mm camera
with manual or autofocus capabilities, with adjustable
focal length, with autoflash, and with date back.
B. Indoor photographs shall be taken using high quality
400 speed print film.
C. Outdoor photographs shall be taken using high quality
100 speed or 200 speed print film.
D. Film shall be developed using Kodak processing and shall
include image files and viewing software in PC format on
Kodak Picture Disk.
E. Prints shall be 4 inches by 6 inches, except
otherwise designated by Owner's Representative.
shall be color, glossy on single weight, white
paper.
where
Prints
based
F. Contractor shall maintain on jobsite a permanent record
of photographs, as well as record prescribed information
on back of each photograph. The photographs shall be
assembled in chronological order in albums with index
(table of contents) for each construction component.
\ \BCtlSHO 3 \ PROJE:CTS \ PP.CJ\ 603 l 3. 0 11 \0 I J8 0. doc 01380-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
0
u
I
I
G. Backside of each print shall be labeled with permanent
record information including film role number, negative
number, date, Site location, direction of photo,
photographer, and subject description.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor shall ~ubmit two sets of photographic albums
to Owner's upon substantial completion of Work .. One set
of prints shall be made available to Owner's
Representative within fourteen ( 14) days of when
photographs taken.
B. Individual albums shall contain an index of photographs
and activities. Albums shall be constructed such that
descriptive information can be accessed without removing
individual photographs.
B. Negatives shall be maintained and submitted in sleeves
in a notebook with adequate labeling to include activity
being documented, date, location, and cross reference to
permanent record.
C. Kodak Picture Disks shall be labeled as to roll number
and dates of photographs and shall be submitted in disc
album upon substantial completion of work.
1.05 OWNERSHIP
A. Negatives shall remain the property of Contractor during
construction, who. shall maintain negatives in safe
storage through the date of substantial completion of
project as designated by Owner. Following substantial
completion, photographs, negatives, and picture disks
shall be delivered to Owner to be incorporated into
permanent record.
1.06 CONSTRUCTION MILESTONES
A. Contractor shall photographically record the following
milestones and activities (at a minimum):
1. Existing conditions prior to construction
2. Well Installation
3. Piping Installation
4. Equipment Installation
5. System Startup
B. Contractor shall photograph additional events
milestones as required by Owner's Representative.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
NOT USED
\ \llCNSHO 3 \ FROJF.CTS \ PPOJ \ tO JI 3 . 0 I l \0 I 380. dnc 01380-2
or
I
I
I PART 3 -EXECUTION
NOT USED
I [END OF SECTION]
'I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I \ \llC!/SHOJ \ rFW,Jl:'.CTS \PROJ \ f,Q 31 3. 0 11 \IJ l JUO . do,; 01380-3
I
I
I
I
I
I .,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 1 -GENERAL
SECTION 01400
QUALITY CONTROL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Section includes guidelines and procedures for
Quality Control and for Construction Quality
Assurance (CQA) during execution of Work as
outlined in Specifications and on Contract
Drawings.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. All applicable technical sections of Specification.
1. 03 REFERENCES
A. Conform to reference standard by date of issue
current on date of Contract Documents.
B. Should specified reference standards conflict with
Contract Documents, request clarification from
Engineer before proceeding.
C. Contractual relationship of parties
shall not be altered from Contract
mention or inference otherwise in
document.
to Contract
Documents by
any reference
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit information as required in Section 01300 and
01340.
1.05 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Quality of all Work performed by Contractor and his
Subcontractors shall be the sole responsibility of
Contractor.
B. Monitor quality control over suppliers,
manufacturers, products, services, site conditions,
and workmanship to produce Work of specified
quality.
C. Comply fully with manufacturers'
including each step in sequence.
instructions,
D. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with
Contract Documents, request clarification from
Engineer before proceeding.
\ \BCNSH(J3\PROJECTS' Pf'OJ\60313. 011 \0 l WO, doc O 1 4 0 0-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
E. Comply with specified standards as a minimum
quality for the work except when more stringent
tolerances, codes, or specified requirements
indicate higher standards or more precise
workmanship.
F. Perform work by persons qualified to produce
workmanship of specified quality.
G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage
devices designed and sized to withstand stresses,
vibration, physical distortion or disfigurement.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Contractor shall test equipment and systems
installed and constructed under this contract.
Objective of quality control testing program shall
be to demonstrate, to Owner's Representative's
complete satisfaction, that structures, systems, and
equipment constructed and installed under this
contract meet all performance requirements and
process is ready for operation.
3. 02 PERFORMANCE TESTS
A. Performance tests shall consist of following:
1. Pressure and/or leakage tests.
2. Electrical testing.
3. Wiring and piping.
4. Preoperational checkout for all mechanical
equipment. Preoperational checkout procedures
shall be reviewed and approved in accordance
with respective equipment manufacturer's
instructions.
5. Initial operation tests of all mechanical,
electrical, and instrumentation equipment and
systems.
[END OF SECTION]
\ \BCN!;flOJ\PROJEC'i:;' f'fl0J\6Cl3 l 3. 01 l \014 00. doc O 1 4 0 0-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 01405
YEAR 2000 PERFORMANCE WARRANTY
PART 1 -GENERAL
Contractor warrants that each Product supplied or installed
under this contract shall be able to accurately Process
date and time data from, into, and between, the twentieth
and twenty-first centuries, and the year 2000, and all
other year transitions, including accurate leap year
calculations, so that other products, components, systems
or other data sources, used in combination with the
Product, properly and accurately exchange date and time
data with such Product. The term ~Productn as used in this
paragraph shall include, but not be limited to, each
hardware, software and firmware product, component, and
system furnished by Contractor. The term ~Processn and its
derivatives, as used in this paragraph, shall include, but
not be limited to, calculating, comparing, and sequencing
data. Prior to final acceptance of any Product, the Owner
may require demonstration of accurate Processing of date
and time data by any Product. This warranty remains in
effect without limitation whether such demonstration is
requested or performed. Nothing in this warranty shall be
construed to limit any rights or remedies Owner may
otherwise have under this Contract or at law or equity.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 -EXECUTION
NOT USED
\ \UCN~,llOJ\PkOJECT::;\Fr''~ J\ (,(J 313. r, l 1 \(J l 4 0~. doc
[END OF SECTION]
01405-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 01500
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS
PART 1 -GENERAL
SCOPE OF WORK
A. Contractor shall furnish and maintain, during
construction of the project, adequate construction
facilities at Site for use of Owner, Engineer,
Owner's Representative, and himself as set forth
below. Upon completion of project, or as directed
by Owner, Contractor shall remove all such
temporary construction facilities and temporary
controls from Site, and leave premises in.condition
required by Contract.
B. Contractor and his subcontractors may maintain
construction facilities and temporary controls on
Site in addition to those specified, as may be
necessary for proper conduct of Work. These shall
be located so as to cause no interference to
Contract Work or facility occupant's activities.
Owner shall be consulted with regard to locations.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 FIELD OFFICE AND OFFICE EQUIPMENT
A. All field offices shall be provided and maintained
by Contractor. Field offices will provide adequate
electrical power and telephone service for duration
of project.
B. Locate office in a location meeting the approval of
Owner or Owner's Representative.
C. Provide separate office space for Owner or Owner's
Representative in field office. Office shall be
equipped with des ks, meeting accommodations, heat,
air conditioning, telephone, facsimile,
electricity, water, and lighting.
\ \BCNSHOJ \PROJECTS\ PROJ\ 60313 . 0 11 \0 l ~f1Q . DOC 01500-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
' I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.02 TEMPORARY SCAFFOLDS
A. Contractor shall provide, erect, maintain, and
remove when directed, all scaffolding, staging,
platforms, temporary runways, temporary flooring,
guards, railings, stairs, etc., as required by
Local, State, and Federal codes or laws, for the
protection of workers and public. The
· construction, inspection, and maintenance of above
items shall comply with all safety codes and
regulations as applicable to project.
3.03 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES
A. Contractor shall provide sanitary facilities for
use by Contractor's employees and subcontractors.
B. Contractor is to provide roll-off containers for
normal, non-hazardous solid waste, (i.e., daily
debris). Contractor is responsible for disposal of
all non-hazardous solid waste.
3.04 TEMPORARY WATER SUPPLY
A. Contractor will be provided access to
water supply for construction purposes
conducted on-Site.
an on-Site
for Work
3.05 TEMPORARY ELECTRICAL SERVICE
A. Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements
for temporary electricity and furnish, at his own
expense, all temporary wiring, lamps, accessories,
and current required for completion of Work.
Contractor shall obtain necessary permits and meet
applicable codes. He shall also provide temporary
lights and wiring for proper execution of
Contractor's and subcontractor's work at a· proper
lighting level that allows for correct installation
of Work. Temporary. wiring shall be installed so as
not to interfere with construction activities or
ongoing on-Site business activity of Owner or
occupant.
3.06 TEMPORARY PROTECTION AGAINST THEFT, DAMAGE, AND
WEATHER
A. Payment by Owner for any materials, equipment, or
labor incorporated into Work shall not be deemed to
be an acceptance by Owner. The risk of loss of
such materials, equipment, or cost of labor spent
to install such, shall remain with Contractor, and
Contractor shall be fully responsible for such
materials, equipment, or labor to same extent as if
\ \BCNSIIO 3 \ PROJE:CTS \PROJ \ 60313, 0l].\01500. DOC 01500-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I ,,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.07
Owner had not paid for such items. Owner will only
be responsible or accept real property after final
inspection and approval by Engineer. Stolen,
damaged, vandalized, missing equipment or material,
or weather damage shall be considered the property
of Contractor until final acceptance by Owner.
PROTECTION OF PERSONNEL, WORK, AND PROPERTY
A. Contractor shall provide and maintain guard lights
at all barricades, railing obstructions, etc.
accessible to any individuals working at Site.
B. Any Work damaged by failure
as required above shall be
with new Work at Contractor's
to provide protection
removed and replaced
expense.
3.08 TEMPORARY HEAT AND COLD WEATHER PROTECTION
A. Contractor shall provide all temporary heating to
protect and keep dry all such Work during cold
weather. Type of temporary heat used shall not in
any manner be detrimental to finished work.
Contractor shall be responsible to determine and
meet applicable codes.
B. Contractor shall provide cold weather protection
and temporary heat as necessary to carry on Work
expeditiously during inclement weather, to protect
all Work and materials against injury from dampness
and cold, and to provide suitable working
conditions for installation and curing of materials
until final acceptance by Owner. Method of heating
and type of fuel and equipment used shall be
subject to approval by the Engineer. Contractor
shall be responsible to determine and meet
applicable codes.
C. Contractor shall
of requirements
Specifications.
comply
other
3.09 CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT
with all specific
sections of these
A. Contractor shall.provide construction equipment and
operating personnel necessary to perform Work.
B. Contractor shall provide equipment with proper
guys, bracing, and other safety devices as required
by local, State, or Federal codes and laws.
C. Contractor shall provide all scaffolding,
platforms, temporary flooring, railing,
\ \ ll(;J/;;)I IJ) \ Pf'OJECTS \ PP.OJ\ 6031].011\01 ~00. [)QC 01500-3
staging,
stairs,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
11
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
etc. as . required by local, State, or Federal laws
and codes for protection of workers and the public.
3.10 PROTECTION
A. Contractor shall replace and put in good working
condition all items (e.g., building walls, floors,
pipe, conduit) damaged or injured in carrying out
contract, unless the same shall be permanently done
away. with by order of Owner as being unnecessary
for the proper execution of Contract.
B. Contractor shall
protect persons
interference or
unobstructed way
pedestrians and
hydrants.
take all proper precautions to
from injury and unnecessary
inconvenience, leave an
along facility roads for
vehicles, and for access to
C. Location of any construction fencing, and areas for
on-Site storage of equipment and other facilities
required by Contractor, shall be subject to
approval by Owner.
3.11 TRUCKING
3.12
A. All trucks bringing to or removing from Site earth,
loose materials, or debris shall be loaded in a
manner to prevent dropping of materials on streets.
B. At all points where trucks leave project Site and
enter adjacent paved streets, Contractor shall
maintain an installation and crew to prevent any
mud from being tracked onto such adj a cent paved
streets.
C. Earth, loose materials,
streets due to contract
be removed daily.
or debris deposited on
trucking activities shall
D. Handle earth materials excavated from trenching
Work in accordance with Section 02220.
CLEANUP DURING.CONSTRUCTION
A. Cleanup shall be performed as required with once
daily serving as the minimum cleanup frequency to
prevent accidents to personnel, protect all Work in
place, and to effect completion of project in an
orderly manner.
of removal of
dirt, trash,
from within
B. Construction cleanup shall consist
all mud, oil, grease, sand,. gravel,
scrap, debris, and excess materials,
\ \ RCNS)l(I 3 \ PRO,] E:CT::; \ Pf.CJJ\ 60.l l 3 . U l I\ Ill '.,OIJ. t,oc 01500-4
I,
I
I
I
' I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Limit of Work for project, that may
or sliding of workers, ladders,
Construction cleanup shall be
satisfaction of Owner.
cause tripping
or equipment.
performed to
3.13 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS
A. Remove temporary above grade
equipment, facilities and
substantial completion
Section 01700).
or buried utilities,
materials prior to
(as defined in
B. Clean and repair all damage caused by installation
or use of temporary Work.
C. Restore existing facilities used
construction to original condition or as
Drawings, or other Specification sections.
[END OF SECTION]
\ \ UCN!,!i/13 \ PROJEC':'S \ PROJ\ 60313.01 l \(J 1 ~uo. DOC 01500-5
during
shown on
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
SECTION 01540
SECURITY
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Project Security Control Measures
B. Work Area Security
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01340 -Submittal Schedule
1.03
B. Section 01500 -Construction Facilities and
Temporary Controls
SUBMITTALS
A. Prepare Work area Security Protocol and submit to
Owner and Owner's Representative for review in
accordance with Section 0134 0 Submittal Schedule.
Include Security Protocol which addresses the
following items at a minimum:
1.04
A.
1. Personnel responsible for implementing and
maintaining security measures in Work area
including names and assigned functions.
2. Description of daily security operations.
3. Description of methods and
security checks at project Site,
frequency
if required.
4. · Description of methods for responding to
following breaches in security:
of
the
a. Entry of unauthorized personnel into Work
area.
b. Site boundary security provisions are
breached.
PROJECT SECURITY CONTROL MEASURES
Protect Work from theft, vandalism, and
unauthorized entry.
\ \ BCN::iH(I) \ PROJ~C':'S\ PROJ\ 60 31 3. 0 1 l \ fJ l ~4 (J. doc 01540-1
I
I
I
D
I
1·
I
I
I
1. 05 WORK AREA SECURITY
A. Contractor shall provide temporary security for
contract Work area. Snow fences or temporary mesh
security fence or other approved means shall be
installed by Contractor in order to define
restricted area and to prevent unauthorized
personnel from entering that area.
8. Contractor shall be responsible for all costs
associated with providing security and access
restriction features, maintaining all features
during construction and removal and disposal of
temporary features at conclusion of Project.
C. Contractor shall maintain a list of personnel
allowed in Work area and exclude entry of all
others. All individuals requesting access shall be
required to display identification.
D. Contractor shall maintain a current log of all
visitors entering and leaving Site.
E. Contractor shall immediately notify Owner or
Owner's Representative of any attempts to enter
Work area by unauthorized personnel or visitors.
F. Under no circumstance shall Contractor convey
project information to persons not directly
involved with project. Refer such persons to
Owner's Representative for answers to questions.
Contractor shall notify Owner or Owner's
Representative of any request for information by
parties not directly involved in project.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 -EXECUTION
NOT USED
\ \BCU,'.;l!rl 3\ PPGJECT:; \ PROJ\ ~u :I I 3. O l l \fl 1 ',4 [J, doc
[END OF SECTION]
01540-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
·I
I
I
SECTION 01560
DUST AND NOISE CONTROLS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Dust control shall
by Contractor to
Work areas.
consist of operations performed
minimize production of dust in
B. Noise control shall consist of operations performed
by Contractor to minimize excessive noise in Work
areas.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01160 -Health and Safety Plan (HASP)
B. Section 02070 -Selective Demolition
C. Section 02220 -Excavating, Backfilling, and
Compacting
D. Section 02672 -Well Drilling and Casing
1.03 DUST CONTROL
A. Contractor shall implement dust control procedures
(e.g., watering) to prevent conditions under which
dust is visible in air and to prevent dust from
leaving Work area.
B. In the event that it becomes necessary in opinion
of Owner, Owner's Representative, or Health and
Safety Officer to provide additional measures to
control release of dust, such measures shall be
immediately implemented by Contractor.
B. Owner shall reserve the right to suspend Work at
any time if necessary due to dust generation which
causes a safety or air quality problem or which may
cause contamination of adjacent areas. Contractor
shall not be entitled to any additional
compensation for suspension of Work under such
conditions.
\ \ Br:tlSHrJJ \PROJECTS\ PP ".,J \ r,11J 1 J . 111 I \ fl 1 ~ r,r; . DOC 01560-1
I
I
I
I
I
I .,
I
I
' ' I
I
1.04 NOISE CONTROL
A. Contractor shall implement noise control procedures
to prevent excessive noise in Work area and
surrounding areas as determined by Owner or by
Owner's Representative.
B. Contractor shall provide necessary measures to
minimize noise occurring due to activities after
normal Work hours. Care must be taken to prevent
excessive noise such that there will be very
minimal disturbance to neighboring residential or
industrial properties.
C. Owner or Owner's Representative shall reserve right
to suspend Work at any time if necessary due to
noise generation causing a safety or excessive
vibration hazard. In the event that OSHA limit of
85 dBA is exceeded for 8 hours per day or a peak
level of 140 dBA is exceeded, a hearing protection
program must be implemented.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 DUST CONTROL
A. Contractor shall implement dust control procedures
(e.g., watering) to prevent conditions under which
dust is visible in air.
B. In the event that it becomes necessary in the
opinion of Owner or Owner's Representative to
provide watering of surfaces to control release of
dust, such watering shall be immediately
implemented by Contractor.
C. Owner or Owner's Representative shall reserve right
to suspend Work at any time if necessary due to
excessive wind velocity or adverse wind direction.
D. Calcium chloride or other chemical methods shall
not be used for dust control. Severe dust problems
shall be controlled with mulch, gravel, or other
temporary methods subject to approval of Owner's
Representative.
[END OF SECTION]
\ \8':l!SHOJ \ PROJEC':' S \ PROJ\ 60 3 l 3.011 \0 l ~ 60 , UOC 01560-2
I
I
I
I
I
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
SECTION 01600
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
A. Material and Equipment Incorporated into Work:
1. Conform to applicable specifications and standards.
2. Comply with size, make, type, and quality specified
or as specifically approved, in writing, by
Engineer.
B. Do not use material or equipment for any purpose other
than that for which it is designed or specified.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01300 -Submittals
B. Section 01340 -Submittal Schedule
1.03 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Requirements for substitutions do not apply to
Contractor options on materials, equipment, and
construction methods. Revisions to Contract Documents,
where requested by Owner or Engineer are ''changes'' not
"substitutions." Contractor's determination of and
compliance with governing regulations and orders issued
by governing authorities do not constitute
"substitutions" and do not constitute basis for change
orders, except a·s provided for in Contract Documents.
B. Contractor's requests for changes in materials and
equipment, and methods of construction required by
Contract Documents, are considered requests for
''substitutions'' and are subject to requirements hereof.
C. Contractor's request for substitution will be received
and considered ~hen all of the following are satisfied:
1. When extensive revisions to Contract Documents are
not required and changes are in keeping with general
intent of Contract Documents;
2. When timely,
submitted; and
3. When one or
satisfied, as
\ \h<':N,'.;H(J"l\ PPOJf.CTC:\!'kCJJ\ 60313.011\01600. DOC
fully documented,
more of the following
judged by Engineer.
01600-1
and properly
conditions is
I
I
I
I ,,
I'
a. Where requests are directly related to an "or
equal'' clause or other language of same effect in
Contract Documents; or
b. Where required, material, equipment, or method
cannot be provided within Contract Time, but not
as result of the Contractor's failure to pursue
Work promptly or to coordinate various activities
properly; or
c. Where required,
cannot receive
authority, and
approved.
material,
required
requested
equipment,
approval by
substitution
or method
governing
can be so
D. Request for substitution constitutes representation that
Contractor:
1. Has investigated proposed material or equipment and
determined it is. equal to or superior to specified.
2. Will provide same warranties or bonds for
substitution as for material or equipment specified.
3 . Will coordinate
substitution into
as may be required
installation of accepted
Work and make such other changes
to make Work complete.
4. Waives claims for additional costs, under
Contractor's responsibility, which may subsequently
become apparent.
1. 04 CONTRACTOR'S OPTIONS/COMPATIBILITY
A. Options:
1. Standards, Codes, and Regulations: Where compliance
with imposed standard, code, or regulation is
required, select from among products which comply
with requirements of those standards, codes, and
regulations.
2 . "Or Equal": For materials and equipment specified
by naming one or more materials or manufacturers and
"or equal", Contractor shall submit request for
substitution for any material or manufacturer not
named, for approval by Engineer.
3 . Two or More Materials/Manufacturers: For material
or equipment specified by naming materials
manufacturers, select any one of materials
manufacturers named. Do not provide or offer
provide unnamed material or manufacturer.
4. Single Material/Manufacturer:
equipment specified by naming
\ \BCNSHO J \ !'PU.JECTS\ PP.OJ\ EO 3 I 3 . 011 \0 I 600. DOC 01600-2
For
only
materials
one material
or
or
to
or
or
I ,,
I
I
E
m,
fi ,,
'D
D ' ,a
g,
B
I
f
I ·.,
:I'
. ,, ,,
I
,,,
·I,
manufacturer, and/or followed by words indicating no
substitution, there is no option.
B. Compatibility:
1. Where more than one choice is available as options
for Contractor's selection of material or equipment,
select option which is compatible with other
equipment and materials already selected.
1.05
2. Compatibility among options is not
limitations within Contract Documents,
provided by Contractor.
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
assured by
but shall be
A. When Contract Documents require that installation of
Work, materials, or equipment to be furnished shall
comply with manufacturer's instructions, obtain and
distribute printed copies of such instructions to
parties involved with installation, including two copies
to Owner.
1. Maintain one set of
during installation
Submit documents in
Submittals.
complete instructions at Jobsite
and until completion of Work.
accordance with Section 01300 -
B. Handle, install, connect, clean,
materials and equipment in
condition, and adjust
accordance with
and in conformity manufacturer's written instructions
with specified requirements.
1. Should job conditions or specified requirements
conflict with manufacturer's instructions, consult
Owner for further instructions .
2. Do not proceed with Work
instructions for manufacture.
without written
1.06 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
A. Arrange delivery of materials and
accordance with construction progress
conditions at Site.
1. Deliver
condition,
packaging,
legible.
materials and equipment
in manufacturer's original
with identifying labels
equipment
schedules
in
and
in undamaged
containers or
intact and
2. Immediately upon delivery, inspect shipments to
assure compliance with requirements of Contract
Documents and approved submittals and that materials
and equipment are protected and undamaged.
\ \ RCllSll(J l \ P!WJE:CT!: \ f'f<~.;'\ 61'.l) l 3 , 011 \ 01 /;!JO, OOC 01600-3
I
I '
I
B. Provide equipment and personnel to handle materials and
equipment by methods recommended by manufacturer to
prevent soiling or damage to materials, equipment or
packaging.
1.07 STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A. Owner assumes no responsibility for materials stored in
buildings or on-Site. Contract6r assumes full
responsibility for damage due to storing of materials.
B. Interior Storage:
1. Store materials and equipment in
manufacturer's instructions, with
intact and legible.
accordance with
seals and labels
2. Store materials and equipment subject to damage by
elements in weathertight enclosures.
3. Maintain temperature and humidity within ranges
required by manufacturer's instructions.
C. Exterior Storage:
1. Store fabricated materials and equipment above
ground, on blocking or skids, to prevent soiling or
staining. Cover materials and equipment which are
subject to deterioration with impervious sheet
coverings, provide adequate ventilation to avoid
condensation.
2. Store loose granular materials. in a well-drained
area on solid surfaces to prevent mixing with
foreign matter.
3. Materials such as pipe shall be stored on pallets or
racks, off the ground.
D. Arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for
inspection and inventory. Make periodic inspections of
stored materials and equipment to assure that materials
and equipment are maintained under specified conditions
and free from damage or deterioration.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
/' NOT USED
,, PART 3 -EXECUTION
NOT USED
\ \ IICtlSHO J \ f'I\OJ£CTS\ PP.OJ\ r,o] 13 . O l l \01600. DOC
[END OF SECTION)
01600-4
I
SECTION 01660
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING OF SYSTEMS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Starting systems.
B. Demonstration and instructions.
C. Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
1. 02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01400 -Quality Control
B. Section 01700 -Project Closeout
1.03 SUBMITTALS
Contractor shall submit report to Owner's
Representative indicating observations and results
of tests and indicating compliance or non-
compliance with requirements of Contract Documents.
1.04 STARTING SYSTEMS
A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various
equipment and systems.
B. Notify Engineer seven days prior to startup of each
item.
C. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has
been checked for proper lubrication, drive
rotation, belt tension, control sequence, or for
other conditions which may cause damage.
D. Verify that tests, meter readings, and specified
electrical characteristics agree with those
required by equipment or system manufacturer.
E. Verify wiring and support components for equipment
are complete and tested.
F. When specified in individual specification
sections, require manufacturer to provide
authorized representative to be present at site to
inspect, check, and approve equipment or system
installation prior to start-up, and to supervise
placing equipment or system in operation.
P;\PROJ\(,0313.011\01660.DOC 01660-1
I
I
G. Submit a written report in accordance with
Section 01700 -Project Closeout that equipment or
system has been properly installed and is
functioning correctly.
1.05 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS
A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of products
to Owner's Representative two weeks prior to date
of final inspection.
B. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis
for instruction. Review contents of manual with
Owner's Representative in detail to explain all
aspects of operation and maintenance.
C. Demonstrate to Owner's Representative start-up,
operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting,
servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each i tern
of equipment at agreed time. Contractor shall
submit to Owner's Representative a system start up
schedule for approval by the Owner's
Representative.
D. Prepare and insert additional data in operations
and maintenance manuals when need for additional
data becomes apparent during instruction.
1.06 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
A. Owner may appoint, employ, and pay for services of
an independent firm to perform testing, adjusting,
and balancing.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 -EXECUTION
NOT USED
r: \PROJ\ 603 l 3. 01 l \01660. DOC
[END OF SECTION]
01660-2
I
I
I
9
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 01700
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
PART 1 -GENERAL
1. 01 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
A. Submit .written certification that Contract
Documents have been reviewed, Work has been
inspected, and that Work is complete in accordance
with Contract Documents and ready for final
inspection by Owner and Owner's Representative.
B. Provide record drawings documentation, all
submittals of Section 01340 of Specifications, and
any other submittals required by governing or other
authorities to Owner and Owner's Representative.
C. Submit Final Application for Payment identifying
total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and
sum remaining due.
1.02 FINAL CLEANING
7>,. Upon completion of Work and prior to final
inspection, Contractor shall remove all of
Contractor's equipment, signs, facilities,
construction materials, and trash, and shall
perform any other reasonable cleanup activities
requested by Owner. All disturbed areas shall be
revegetated or otherwise put into a condition
satisfactory to Owner. Finished grades shall
promote positive drainage to drainage swales where
possible.
1. 03 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Contractor shall maintain on Site, one set of the
following record documents:
1. Drawings
2. Specifications
3. Addenda
4. Change Orders
Contract
5. Reviewed
samples
Shop
and other modifications to
Drawings, Product Data, and
\ \!JCNSIJO l \PROJECTS\ PROJ\ 60J 1 3, 0 l l \ 0 l? 00. doc 01700-1
I
I
I
I
I
1.04
B. Contractor shall store Project Record Documents
separate from documents used for construction.
C. Contractor shall record information concurrent with
construction progress.
D. Record Documents and Shop Drawings shall be legibly
marked by Contractor for each item to record actual
construction, including:
1. Field changes of dimension and detail
2. Details not on original Contract Drawings
SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor shall submit documents to Owner.
1. Written certification of project completion and
readiness of final inspection.
2. Project record documents.
3. Final Application for Payment.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 -EXECUTION
NOT USED
\ \BCtlSllO 3 \ PROJE:Ci'5 \ PROJ\ 60 31 3 . 011 \0 l 700, doc
[END OF SECTION]
01700-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
g
SECTION 01730
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Format and contents of manuals
B. Schedule of submittals
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01340 -Submittal Schedule
B. Section 01400 -Quality Control
C. Section 01600 -Material and Equipment
D. Section 01700 -Project Closeout
E. Individual Specifications Sections:
requirements for operation and maintenance
1. 03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Specific
data.
A. Prepare instructions and
experienced in maintenance
described products.
data
and
by personnel
operation of
1. 04 FORMAT
A. Consult with Owner to determine documentation
requirements.
B. Binders: Commercial quality 8 1/2-inch by 11
inches three-ring binders with hardback, cleanable
plastic covers; 1-inch maximum ring size. When
multiple binders are used, correlate data into
related consistent groupings.
C. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed
title OPERATibN AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS, list
title of Project, identify subject matter of
contents.
D. Arrange content by system under Section numbers and
sequence of Table of Contents of this Project
Manual.
P:\PROJ\60313.011\01730.DOC 01730-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
0
E. Provide tabbed fly leaf for each separate product
and system, with typed description of product and
major component parts of equipment.
F. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten
data on 20 pound paper.
G. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder
tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to
size of text pages.
1.05 CONTENTS, EACH VOLUME
A. Table of Contents: Provide title of Project;
names, addresses, and telephone numbers of
Engineer, subconsul tan ts, and Contractor with name
of responsible parties·; schedule of products and
systems, indexed to content of the volume.
B. For Each Product or System: List names, addresses,
and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and
suppliers (where applicable), including local
source of supplies and replacement parts.
C. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify
specific products and component parts, and data
applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable
information.
data to illustrate
of equipment and
diagrams. Do not
as maintenance
D. Drawings: Supplement product
relations of component parts
systems, to show control and flow
use Project Record Documents
drawings.
E. Type Text: As required to supplement product data.
Provide logical sequence of instructions for each
procedure, incorporating manufacturer's
instructions specified in Section 01400 -Quality
Control.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit two (2)
proposed formats
start of Work.
copies of preliminary draft or
and outlines of contents before
8. For equipment or component parts
into service during construction
Owner, submit documents within
acceptance.
of equipment put
and operated by
ten days after
C. Submit one ( 1) copy of completed volumes in final
form 14 days prior to final inspection. Copy will
f'; \PROJ\f,0313. 0 11\01730. DOC 01730-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
m
I
I
D
be returned after final inspection with Engineer's
comments·. Revise content of documents as required
prior to final submittal.
D. Submit two (2) copies of revised volumes of data in
final form within ten days after final inspection.
E. Submit two ( 2) copies of a detailed spare parts
list for the air sparging, soil vapor extraction,
a~d off-gas treatment systems to the Owner.
FART 2 -PRODUCTS
NOT USED
FART 3 -EXECUTION
NOT USED
P: \l'kO,J\ 60313, 011 \011 JO. DOC
[END OF SECTION]
01730-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
m
I
g
0
D
DIVISION 2
SITE WORK
\ \BCNSHIJ 1 \ PR0JtCTS\PP.0J\ 603 13 , 011 \ep"c toe. doc
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
g
D
SECTION 02070
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 -GENERAL
1. 01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials,
tools, supervision, transportation, and equipment
necessary to perform demolition work specified
herein, as shown on Drawings, and as necessary for
a complete installation of air sparging and soil
vapor extraction systems. Demolition work
includes, but is not limited to the following:
1. Equipment, utilities, and structures to be
moved and/or demolished
a. Wall penetrations for air sparging and soil
vapor extraction piping.
b. Concrete pavement
installation.
c. Concrete pavement
installation.
as
as
required for
required for
d. Block wall for overhead door installation
well
pipe
B. Contractor shall define in submittals and provide
any repiping or other site modifications required
to provide adequate access for FCX OU3 Remedial
Action.
C. Related Sections:
1. 02
1. Section 01010 -Summary of Work
2. Section 01340 -Submittal Schedule
3. Section 15060 -Piping Systems and Appurtenances
EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Drawings indicate physical dimensions, general
location of existing equipment, utilities, and
structures, and existing levels and general layout
of area to assist Contractor in evaluation of Work.
Contractor shall visit Site before bidding and take
full responsibility for interpreting Drawings and
for the conclusions drawn from them.
P; \PROJ\60313. 0 l l \02070. 00C 02070-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
a
0
D
u
I
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Detailed procedures for all methods
proposed for demolition.
and materials
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.01 CONCRETE FLOOR SLAB
A. Use 4,500 psi concrete for trench floor slab
repair.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 EQUIPMENT AND STRUCTURE DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL
A. All demolition plans are subject to approval by
Owner prior to onset of demolition Work.
B. Contractor shall provide all required equipment to
access Work.
C. All cutting of concrete floor slab shall be through
full thickness of slab.
D. Extreme care shall be taken to protect items to
remain. Facility may be active and utilities
cannot be shut down during construction unless
specifically authorized by Owner.
E. Large equipment items to be removed shall be
disassembled and/or cut into smaller size pieces to
simplify lifting, transport, and disposal.
F. Any damages to facilities or equipment that are to
remain shall be repaired by Contractor as part of
Work at no additional cost to Owner.
[END OF SECTION]
r: \PI\OJ\ f;O] 13. 01 l \02010. DOC 02070-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
0
D
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02220
EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools,
supervision, transportation, and installation equipment
to perform all excavation Work as specified herein, as
shown on Drawings and as necessary to complete Work.
B. Contractor shall be prepared to construct all necessary
excavations in conjunction with other aspects of Work.
C. Work of this section includes
limited to) excavation and
conduits, etc.
(but is not necessarily
backfilling for piping,
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 15060 -Piping Systems and Appurtenances
1. 03 REFERENCES
A. Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of
the following, except as otherwise shown or specified.
1. Latest version of American Society for Testing and
Methods (ASTM) .
a. D 422
b. D 698
c. D 2487
Test Method for Particle-Size Analysis of
Soils.
Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction
Characteristics of Soil Using Standard
Effort (12,400 ft-lb/ft3).
Test Method for Classification
for Engineering Purposes.
of Soils
1. 04 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Permits and Regulations
1. Contractor shall perform excavation
compliance with applicable requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction.
\ \ hn1;.1111 ·n rrm,11-:r:T~ \ l'ROJ\ 60 3 1 1. 0 l l \0 2220. DOC 02220-1
Work in
governing
I
E
I
u
D
D
u
I
0
0
0
I
I
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit information on compaction equipment to be used on
Project.
B. Submit samples of pipe bedding materials to geotechnical
laboratory as required within this specification.
C. Submit analysis demonstrating conformance with this
specification.
1.06 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Existing Structures: Shown on Drawings are certain
surface and underground structures adjacent to Work.
· This information has been obtained from existing
records. It is not guaranteed to be correct or complete
and is shown for the convenience of Contractor.
Contractor shall explore ahead of required excavation to
determine exact location of all structures. They shall
be supported and protected from injury by Contractor.
If they are broken or injured, they shall be restored
immediately by Contractor at no cost to Owner.
B. Existing Utilities: Locate existing underground
utilities in areas of Work. Approximate locations of
known underground and above ground utility lines and
structures are shown on Drawings. Contractor shall
verify these locations. Existing utilities are to
remain in place and have adequate means of protection
provided during earthwork operations.
1. Should uncharted or incorrectly charted piping or
other utilities be encountered during excavation,
consult Owner's Representative immediately for
directions as how to proceed. Cooperate with Owner
and utility companies in keeping respective services
and facilities in operation. Repair damaged
utilities to satisfaction of utility owner.
2 . Do not interrupt existing utilities serving
facilities occupied and used by Owner or others,
except when permitted in writing by Owner's
Representative and then only after acceptable
temporary utility services have been provided.
C. Protection of Persons and Property:
1. Barricade open excavations occurring as part of this
Work.
2. Take appropriate precautions,
Health and Safety Plan, to
\ \B,:tl~llO 3 \PROJECTS\ PI\OJ\ EO 3l3.011 \01 ~ 20. DOC 02220-2
in accordance with the
protect persons from
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
g
contamin.ated soils, liquids, and vapors that may be
encountered during excavation.
3. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements,
and other facilities from damage caused by
settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout
and other hazards created by earthwork operationi.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.01 EXCAVATED MATERIALS
A. Backfill
1. Backfill materials shall consist of excavated soil
that is free of debris, foreign objects, excess
silt, roots, and organics. Maximum particle size
shall not exceed 2.0 inches in any dimension.
B. Pipe Bedding Material
1.
2 .
3.
Contractor shall furnish and place bedding material
as shown on Drawings and in accordance with Part 3
of this Section. This material shall be placed at
such locations as shown on Drawings and as Owner's
Representative shall specifically order in writing
to replace material unsuitable for foundations or
structure of pipe or, to increase load carrying
capacity of pipe.
Material shall be a
suitable for pipe
material shall be a
of hard material,
foreign material.
Material Sources:
non-angular pit-run sand gravel,
bedding material. In general,
local sand, pit run, with grains
primarily quartz, and free of
a. Contractor shall employ an independent testing
laboratory approved by Owner's Representative to
carry out the following tests on proposed material
source and shall submit test data to Owner's
Representative. Test frequency shall be one
sample per every 15 cu yd of material used for
following tests:
i. ASTM D 422
Analysis)
Mechanical Gradation (Sieve
ii. ASTM D 2487 -Classification
\ \1,01:;uo] \ /'Fl(J.JJ-:CTC.\ l'F\Q.J\ ljO) I 1 . 0 11 \O~ 2 :o, D(J(; 02220-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
b. Final approval of a source for pipe
material will be at sole discretion of
Representative.
bedding
Owner's
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Contractor shall identify
contours, and datum.
required lines, levels,
B. Contractor shall maintain and protect
utilities, which may pass through Work area.
existing
C. Contractor
structures
traffic.
shall protect benchmarks
from excavation equipment
and existing
and vehicular
D. Contractor shall protect above and below grade utilities
which are to remain.
E. Pipe Trench Preparation:
1. Contractor
in advance
practical.
shall limit the length of trench opened
of pipe laying to the greatest extent
2. Trench width shall be minimized to greatest extent
practical but shall conform to the following:
a. Sufficient to provide
jointing, and inspecting
wider at top of pipe than
2 feet.
room for installing,
piping, but in no case
the outermost pipes plus
b. Enlargements at pipe joints may be made if
required and approved by Engineer.
c. Sufficient for sloping and dewatering.
d. Sufficient to allow thorough compacting of
backfill adjacent to bottom half of pipe.
e. Do not use excavating equipment which requires
trench to be excavated to excessive width.
3. Depth of trench shall be as indicated on Drawings.
If required and approved by Engineer, depths may be
revised.
\ \[lctl~)!{I) \ PRO,l~:CT ,;\ !'ROJ\ 603 l .l . 0 11 \O;':>:: 11 . nae 02220-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
•
I
3.02 EXCAVATION
A. Excavate subsoil to depth required for placement of
piping.
B. Cut trenches sufficiently wide to enable installation of
piping and to allow inspection; dewater trench if
necessary.
C. Soft or loose areas shall be excavated and backfilled
with pipe bedding material. Loose matter shall be
removed from excavation and stockpiled in pre-approved
stockpile area.
D. Correct unauthorized or mistaken excavation at no cost
to Owner.
3.03 BACKFILL PLACEMENT
A. Trench requiring backfill material shall be prepared to
existing lines and grades shown on Drawings.
B. Trench backfill material shall meet requirements of Part
2 of this Specification.
C. Backfill material is to be placed in loose lifts that
results in a compacted lift thickness not to exceed six
inches.
D. Each lift of backfill material shall be thoroughly
compacted using suitable compaction equipment and
compactive effort resulting in nonyielding conditions
(95% compaction -Standard Proctor).
3.04 PIPE BEDDING PLACEMENT
A. Bedding shall be placed in layers of uniform thickness
not exceeding six inches and shall be thoroughly
compacted with suitable power driven tampers or other
power driven equipment. Special care shall be taken
when placing pipe bedding to ensure continuous and
thorough compaction. Warning tape to be placed at
1 feet below grade (maximum depth) above soil vapor
extraction lines.
3.05 SURVEYING AND CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
A. Contractor shall retain a North Carolina licensed Land
Surveyor who shall be responsible for all surveying
associated with Contractor's Work. All surveying shall
be performed in accordance with Section 01050 of these
Specifications .
\ \llCNSH03\rHOJ£CTS\Pl'.OJ\ 6/JJ 13. O 11 \0~~20. 1,oc 02220-5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. Contractor. shall construct Work to tolerances given in
Section 01050 of these Specifications.
C. Surveyor shall prepare as-built documentation
earthwork in accordance with requirements and
given in Section 01050 of these Specifications.
3.06 PROTECTION OF WORK
for all
schedule
A. Contractor shall use all means necessary to protect all
prior Work, including all materials and completed Work
of other sections.
B. In event of damage, Contractor shall immediately make
all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval
of Owner's Representative and at no additional cost to
Owner.
3.07 SAFETY PROVISIONS
A. All trenching shall be performed in strict accordance
with OSHA and all other applicable laws and regulations.
B. Shoring and bracing shall be used as required by OSHA or
as required by conditions at site.
C. All trenching shall be observed and supervised by a
competent person as defined in Section 00800.
3.08 DECONTAMINATION
A. Contractor shall steam clean excavation equipment prior
to mobilizing to Site.
B. Equipment which comes in contact with
shall be decontaminated by steam cleaning
water only) prior to leaving Site.
C. Decontamination shall be performed
decontamination pad shown on Drawings.
soil cuttings
(high pressure
at existing
D. Contractor shall collect and containerize all washwater
for subsequent disposal.
[END OF SECTION]
P: \FROJ\60313, 011 \02220. DOC 02220-6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02444
CHAIN LINK FENCING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
1.02
A. Scope of Work:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and such miscellaneous items as
necessary for complete installation of 8-foot high chain link fence system
as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. Fencing to be installed
according to manufacturer's specifications unless otherwise indicated and
specified herein.
B. Related Work Described Elsewhere:
1. Submittals: Section 01340.
2. Structural Steel: Section 05120.
SUBMITTALS
A. The CONTRACTOR shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section
01340.
PART 2 • PRODUCTS
2.01 MA TE RIALS
A. The fabric, posts, fastenings, fittings and other accessories for chain link fence
shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 181 with the following changes:
B.
99-42-019.0
1.
2.
The weight of coating of wire fabric shall be 1.2 ounces of zinc per square
foot (Class B).
The galvanizing of steel materials shall be hot-dipped galvanized.
3. The weight of coating on posts and braces shall be 1.8 ounces of zinc per
square foot, both inside and outside to meet the requirements of
AASHTO M 111.
The base metal of the fabric shall be a good commercial quality 9 gage steel
wire. The fabric shall be of uniform quality, and shall be 8-foot high with a 2-inch
mesh size.
08/17/99
02444-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C. All posts and rails shall be in accordance with the following schedule, or
reasonably close depending on supplier's standards:
1. End, corner and pull posts: 2-3/8" O.D., Schedule 40.
2. Line posts and gate frames: 2' O.D., Schedule 40.
3. Gate posts: 3" O.D., Schedule 40.
4. Post graces and top rail: 1-5/8" O.D., Schedule 20.
D. Tension wire shall be 0.177 inch coiled spring wire tensioned along the bottom of
the fabric and shall be coated similarly to the wire fabric.
E. Miscellaneous fittings and hardware shall be zinc coated commercial quality or
better steel or zinc coated cast or malleable iron as appropriate for the article.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 POST SETTING
A. All posts shall be set three (3) feet deep in concrete footings. 10'. minimum-12'
maximum diameter for line posts, gate and corner posts.
B. After the post has been set, aligned and plumbed, the hole shall be filled with
2,500 p.s.i. concrete. The concrete shall be thoroughly worked into the hole so
as to leave no voids. The exposed surface of the concrete shall be flat to blend
with existing concrete slab-on-grade.
C. End, corner, pull and gate posts shall be braced to the nearest post with a
horizontal brace used as a compression member and a galvanized 3/8-inch steel
truss rod and truss tightener used as a tension member. All chain link fence shall
be constructed with a top rail and bottom tension wire.
3.02 GATES
3.03
A. One, 36" (min.) wide gate shall be hinged to swing through 180 degrees from
closed to open and shall be complete with latches, locking device, hinges, fabric
and braces. The gate shall be the same height as the fence and the gate fabric
shall be the same as the fence fabric.·
PLACING FABRIC
A. The fabric shall not be placed until the posts have been permanently positioned
and concrete foundations have attained approx.imately 2,000 psi compressive
strength. The fabric shall be placed by securing one end and applying sufficient
tension to remove all slack before making permanent attachments at
intermediate points.
99-42-019.0 08/17/99
02444-2
I
I
I B. The fabric shall be fastened to all corner, end and pull posts by substantial and
approved means. Tension for stretching the fabric shall be applied by
mechanical fence stretchers.
I END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1·
I
I
I I
I 99-42-019.0 08/17199
02444-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02672
WELL DRILLING AND CASING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This section includes all labor, materials, tools,
supervision, transportation, and installation necessary
for soil vapor extraction (SVE) and air sparging (AS)
wells and monitoring probes indicated on Drawings.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01050 -Contractor Field Engineering
B. Section 02220 -Excavating, Backfilling, and Compacting
C. Section 15060 -Piping Systems and Appurtenances
1. 03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit grain-size curve for filter pack materials.
B. Submit manufacturer's
well casings, screens,
specifications
and sumps.
and details
C. Submit Shop Drawings
concentric (2" inside 4")
of fabricated
installation.
end cap
for
for
D. Submit fabrication detail of well head assembly and
provide sufficient support for equipment.
E. Submit recoids of drilling and well installation as
detailed in Part 1.05 of this Specification.
F. Submit Shop Drawings of 18-inch manhole and cover
penetrations.
G. Submit driller's qualifications including experience,
drilling equipment, methods, etc.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. All applicable federal, state, and local regulations.
B. ANSI/AWWA Al00 -Standard for Wells.
C. ASTM D 1785 Standard Specification for PVC Pipe
Schedules 40, 80, and 120.
P; \PROJ\60313. 011 \02672, DOC 02672-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D. ASTM D 5092 Standard Specification for Well
Installation.
E. ASTM C 150
Cement.
Standard Specification for Portland
1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Accurately survey locations and record ground surface
~levations and elevations of top of well casings at
reference points to be identified by Owner's
Representative.
B. Accurately record depth,
encountered.
and drilling difficulties
C. Submit signed copy of Contractor's log book statements.
D. Submit log of drilling and well log:
1. Submit records to Owner's Representative; show
material encountered, depth drilled, casing placed,
grouting completed, water level in well, and other
pertinent data requested by Owner's Representative.
2. File copies of Contractor's log with Agencies, as
required.
E. Measure depth from existing ground surface at well site.
Set reference point to established datum (NGVD)
F. Measure and record size of hole and type of
construction completed.
1.06 QUALITY CONTROL I A. Perform work in accordance with ANSI/AWWA Al00.
g
0
I
0
D
1.07 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Drilling subcontractor: Company specializing in
drilling and AS/SVE well experience in performing Work
of this section with minimum of ten years of documented
experience.
1.08
B. Submit proof of applicable license or certification to
perform this Work.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Contractor shall conform to
state, and local regulations
and monitoring probes.
all applicable
for construction
federal,
of wells
P: \PII0J\60313. 011\02672. DOC 02672-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
11
I
I
I
I
I
B. Contractor
applicable·
permits.
shall be responsible for
drilling, well installation,
obtaining all
and abandonment
1.09 WATER SOURCE
A. Secure access
used during
installation.
to nearby source of potable
all phases of drilling
water
and
to be
well
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.01 WELL MATERIALS
A. Well Casing:
1. Final lengths and elevations: as shown on Drawings.
2. Casing pipe: Schedule 4 0 PVC pipe (ASTM 0178 5) ,
with. Schedule 40 flush joint threaded couplings,
four-inch and two-inch nominal diameters.
3. Coupled joints: Each length of casing shall be
factory assembled with a male and a female flush
joint threaded coupling. Couplings shall be
manufactured with an 0-ring sealing mechanism which
renders each joint water-tight after assembly in
field. Casing lengths shall be shipped with thread
protectors/covers on each end.
4. Centralizers: Locate at two feet above casing
bottom, then placed every 15 feet.
B. Well Screen:
1.
2.
3 .
4 .
5 .
6.
Well · Screen (PVC) : Schedule 4 0 PVC continuous-slot
screen, 4-inch and 2-inch diameter.
Screen length shall be as shown on Drawings.
Screened depth interval shall be as shown on Drawing
or as determined by Owner's Representative.
Screen slot size shall be 0.010 inch.
Each screen section shall be factory completed with
a flush joint threaded male or female (to be
selected by Contractor) coupling at top, for
attachment to the well casing. Coupling shall be as
described in Part 2.01 A.3., above.
A 4-inch
shall be
diameter specially
attached by threads
fabricated PVC sump
to bot tom of screen.
P; \rFl.OJ\6031 3. 011 \02672. DOC 02672-3
I
I
I
a
0
D
D
D
D
D
8
u
u
u
u
I
I
u
Sump shall have a 2-inch female threaded nipple for
installation of interior 2-inch well.
7. A 2-inch diameter sump shall be attached by threads
to bottom of the 2-inch screen.
C. Filter Pack:
1. Filter pack shall consist of graded, hard
siliceous particles, washed and screened
uniformity coefficient of approximately 2.5
durable
with a
or less.
2. Size and gradation of primary filter pack shall be
compatible with 10 slot screen or as determined by
Owner's Representative during construction.
3 . Place filter pack
operation by tremie
proper placement.
in
pipes
uniform and continuous
or by pumping to insure
D. Bentoni te Seal:
1. Bentonite shall be sodium montomorillionite and free
of impurities and additives.
2. Place bentonite seal in annular space between
borehole and well casing from top of filter pack to
elevation as shown on Drawings or as directed by
Owner's Representative. Thickness of bentonite seal
shall be checked with a weighted tape.
3 . Place bentonite
complete filling
on Drawings
Representative.
seal in such manner as
of annulus in the range
or as directed by
to ensure
indicated
Owner's
E. Cement/Bentonite Grout:
1. Grout: Portland cement ASTM C 150; maximum water
content seven gallons per 94-pound bag of cement.
2.
3.
4.
Bentonite clay:
portland cement,
fluidity.
Three to six percent, by weight of
shall be added to grout to increase
Provide cement/bentonite grout in
between borehole and well casing
bentonite seal to elevation shown on
directed by Owner's Representative.
annular space
from top of
Drawings or as
Place cement/bentonite grout by tremie method in
such manner as to completely fill annular space
between borehole and well casing.
P: \PROJ\WJ lJ. 011\02672. DOC 02672-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
5 .
6.
7.
Extend grout pipe
initially, and keep
placement of grout.
to
end
bottom of
submerged
annular
in grout
space
during
Place grout in continuous operation to insure proper
sealing.
Allow a minimum of 24
grout curing before
operations.
hours for cement/bentonite
resuming well construction
F. Water:
1. Water to be used in drilling process, to prepare
grout mixtures, and to decontaminate well screen,
riser, and annular sealant injection equipment shall
be potable water, free of constituents that can
compromise the integrity of well installation.
2. Potable water is available at Site. Contractor
shall be responsible for getting it turned on and
providing own equipment for connections, etc.
G. Drilling Fluid Additives:
1. If a drilling fluid additive is required during
drilling, only a natural organic polymer (Revert® or
equivalent) type of additive shall be used. Use of
additives shall be in accordance with manufacturer's
specifications.
H. Manholes:
1. Contractor shall provide and install manholes at
each well and monitoring probe as shown on Drawings.
Manholes shall be of a diameter to provide clearance
shown on Drawings and shall be 18-inches in depth.
2. Manholes shall have 18-inch opening with lockable
cover.
3. Contractor shall custom fabricate cover for
penetrations for air sparge and soil vapor
extraction piping as shown on Drawings. Cover shall
be configured to allow opening and closing and to
cover openings which may present a hazard. Submit
Shop Drawings of cover penetrations for approval by
Owner's Representative.
4. All manhole covers shall be traffic rated.
5. Boart Longyear U.S. Products Group, or approved
equal.
!': \PROJ\60313. 01 l \02612. DOC 02672-5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that Site conditions will support equipment for
performing drilling operations.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Protect structures near each well location
Damage to existing structures shall be
replaced at no cost to Owner.
from damage.
repaired or
8. Locate and mark below-ground utilities. Provide
sufficient notification to local Dig Safe Agency.
C. Coordinate drilling with Owner's Representative.
D. Schedule Work such that Owner's Representative is
present during drilling and well installation Work.
3.03 DRILLING AND FORMATION SAMPLES
A. Prior to drilling borehole, formation samples shall be
obtained on a continuous basis within the interval to be
screened, or as directed by Owner's Representative.
Samples shall be obtained by direct push methods (e.g.
Ge op robe) . Upon retrieval, samples will be visually
evaluated by Owner's Representative who will then give
Contractor authorization to proceed with remainder of
drilling tasks.
8. Secure, protect, and deliver all
samples to laboratory or Owner's
appropriate).
test-hole formation
Representative (as
C. A 10-inch nominal diameter borehole shall be drilled for
the installation of AS/SVE wells and monitoring probes.
Boreholes shall be drilled using hollow-stem auger
(6-5/8-inch nominal I.D.) methods, or by alternate
methods as approved by Owner's Representative.
3.04 WELL INSTALLATION
A. Installation of soil vapor extraction
sparging wells, and monitoring probes:
wells, air
1. Wells/monitoring probes will be constructed
according to American Water Works Association (AWWA)
well construction standards or in accordance with
ASTM D 5092. Well screen shall have a diameter as
shown on Drawings.
P:\PROJ\60313.011\02672.DOC 02672-6
I
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2 . Completion depth
screen position,
may be adjusted
log of borehole
samples.
of each well/monitoring probe,
length, and slot size of the screen
by Owner's Representative based on
and evaluation of split-spoon soil
3. Filter pack materials, as specified in
Section 2.0lC, shall be placed in a uniform and
continuous operation by tremie pipes or by pumping
into annulus, while simultaneously retrieving auger
flight until filter pack extends to elevations
specified on Drawings or as directed by Owner's
Representative. Periodically during placement of
filter packs, a measuring tape shall be lowered down
annulus to confirm that the pack is reaching desired
locatio[).
4. After filter pack is confirmed to extend to
specified elevation or elevation directed by Owner's
Representative, bentonite pellets shall be placed
into annulus as shown on Drawings. Again,
periodically during placement of bentonite pellets,
a measuring tape shall be lowered down annulus to
ensure that pellets have not bridged annulus at a
higher level.
3. 05 ALIGNMENT
A. Construct borehole and set well casing plumb and true to
line.
B. Check for plumbness and alignment in presence of Owner's
Representative; remeasure after completion of well.
C. Plumbness: Maximum deviation shall not exceed 2-percent
of well depth.
D. Alignment: Check
construction; correct
prior to installation.
well casing
misalignment
alignment
of coupled
during
joints
E. If Owner's Representative determines that plumbness or
alignment fail to meet specifications, Contractor shall
correct any arid all deficiencies at no expense to Owner.
3.06 ABANDONMENT
A. If Owner's Representative determines that
well fails to conform to specifications
and/or alignment or, in event Contractor
construct a borehole or well to specified
well shall be abandoned. ,
I': \rROJ\ 60J 13. 011 \02672. DOC 02672-7
a borehole or
for plumbness
is unable to
settings, such
I
I
I
I
0
I
B. Contractor shall construct replacement borehole or well
at location designated by Owner's Representative; no
payment will be made for abandoned wells, as defined in
Section 3.06A.
C. Wells shall be abandoned in accordance with EPA or
North Carolina State Regulations. Protective casing of
abandoned well shall be cut off at grade or removed
entirely. Well shall be cleared of pipe, debris, and
all other obstructions which would i·n any way impede
proper sealing. Sealing materials shall be pumped into
well under pressure through a tremie pipe which
discharges at bottom of well. During sealing, tremie
pipe may be raised from bottom of well in a manner which
insures that discharge end of tremie pipe is constantly
submerged within column of undiluted sealing material in
well. Sealing material shall be pumped into well .until
all water has been displaced from well and until the
sealing material overflowing well is of same density and
consistency as sealing material being pumped into well.
Sealing material shall be pumped through tremie as it is
retrieved.
D. Licensed certified well Contractor who seals well shall
return to Site no sooner than 24 hours nor later than 48
hours and fill all settling in well with concrete.
Additional concrete shall be poured to form a slab which
shall encompass top of casing. This slab may be located
at or below grade. Con tractor who sealed well shall
submit a complete, legible, Well Abandonment Report to
Owner's Representative. Any variation from above
procedure are subject to approval in writing by Owner's
Representative prior to sealing well. ·
E. Salvaged materials may be used in new wells if not
damaged and if suitably decontaminated.
3. 07 TWO-INCH WELL DEVELOPMENT
A. Remove and containerize fine material at the bottom of
each well using bailer or sand pump.
B. Pump well to remove any
surrounding well screen.
on to surge water through
fine-grained soil immediately
Periodically turn pump off and
well screen.
C. Run surge block up and down cased section of well above
screen. Initial surging motion should be relatively
gentle, allowing any material blocking .screen to break
up, go into suspension, and then move into well. As
water begins to move easily both into and out of screen,
lower surge block in steps to just above screen.
Continue surging for several minutes, then pull block
from well.
P; \PROJ\6031 J. 011 \02612. DOC 02672-8
I
I
ll
I
I
I
I
I
I
D. Remove and containerize any sediment from bottom of well·
with a bailer or sand pump.
E. Continue above process until Owner's Representative is
satisfied that well has reached its maximum yield, based
on formation characteristics and suspended solids in
discharge are acceptable to Owner's Representative.
Insufficient yield caused by well installation materials
or methods shall be corrected at no additional cost to
Owner.
F. Well development water shall be collected and
containerized by Contractor. Volume of water generated
in development of well shall be recorded by Contractor.
Owner will be responsible for proper disposal after
containerization of water by Contractor.
G. Complete the above well development procedures as soon
as possible following well construction.
3.08 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Contractor shall be responsible for employing state-of-
the-practice drilling methods for wells and monitoring
probes.
B. Methods employed by Contractor shall provide for an
effective hydraulic connection between the 2-inch well
and formation. Poor well yield caused by well
installation or development procedures shall be
corrected by Contractor at no additional cost to Owner,
and shall include additional development, additional
development with additives, or well replacement, all as
necessary to provide a properly functioning well.
C. Specification herein of materials and methods shall not
relieve Contractor from responsibility for constructing
a properly functioning well.
3.09 SOIL CUTTINGS AND DRILLING DERIVED MATERIALS
A. Soil cuttings and drilling derived materials (e.g.
development water, etc.) shall be placed in container(s)
for subsequent disposal. Owner shall be responsible for
disposal of soil cuttings in accordance with all
applicable state and federal regulations. Disposal
tasks to include, but not limited to chemical
characterization· of soil cuttings, determining an
approved disposal site (hazardous and nonhazardous, as
appropriate) will be performed by Owner.
P: \PIIO,J\ ~031 J, 011 \02672. DOC 02672-9
I
I
I
u
~'
I
I
1·
I
I
I
I
3.10 DECONTAMINATION
A. Contractor shall steam clean drilling equipment prior to
mobilizing to Site.
B. Drilling
cuttings
pressure
equipment which comes in contact with
shall be decontaminated by steam cleaning
water only) prior to leaving Site.
soil
(high
C. Decontamination shall be performed
decontamination pad shown on Drawings.
at existing
D. Contractor shall collect and containerize all washwater
for subsequent disposal.
[END OF SECTION]
P; \PR0,l\603 l J. 01 l \02612. DOC 02672-10
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
•
I
I
•·
m·
m
n
n
u ,,,
0
0
I
DIVISION 5
METALS
\ \!<Cl/:lUfl 3 \ PflOJECT~ \ PROJ\ 60 11 ) • 0 l l \ :;r,-,r: toe, doc
I
I
I
I ,,
V ,,
1,
I
I'
,I'
I J
i'
I
I'
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 05120
STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provIsIons of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes fabrication and erection of structural steel work, as shown on drawings, including schedules, notes, arid details showing size and location of members, typical connections, and types of steel required.
1. Structural steel is that work defined in American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) "Code of Standard Practice" and as otherwise shown on drawings.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Specification Section 01340.
8. Manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for following products.
1. Structural steel fabricated plate trim at overhead door opening.
2. High-strength bolts (each type), including nuts and washers.
3. Steel pipe bollards.
C. Shop drawings including complete details for fabrication and assembly of structural steel members.
1.04 QUALITY CONTROL
A.
99-42-019.0
Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of following, except as otherwise indicated:
8/17/99 05120-1
B.
1.
2.
3.
4.
AISC "Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings," including
"Commentary."
"Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490
Bolts" approved by the Research Council on Structural
Connections.
American Welding Society (AWS) D1 .1 "Structural Welding Code -
Steel.".
ASTM A 6 "General Requirements for Delivery of Rolled Steel
Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling and Bars for Structural Use."
Qualifications for Welding Work: Qualify welding procedures and welding
operators in accordance with AWS "Qualification" requirements.
1. Provide certification that welders to be employed in work have
satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests.
2. If re-certification of welders is required, retesting will be
CONTRACTOR's responsibility.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to site at such intervals to ensure uninterrupted progress
of work.
B. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices, which are to be bolted
through the existing masonry.
C. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification.
Keep steel members off ground by using pallets, platforms, or other
supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion
and deterioration.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
I 2.01 MATERIALS
I
I
I
1:-
A.
99-42-019.0
Metal Surfaces, General: For fabrication of work that will be exposed to
view, use only materials that are smooth and free of surface blemishes
including pitting, rust and scale seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade
names, and roughness. Remove such blemishes by grinding, or by
welding and grinding, prior to cleaning, treating, and applying surface
finishes.
8/17/99
05120-2
I
I
I
I
·I ,, ,,
I
' I
1·,
:1,
I
I
I
~
I
·I.
.1·
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
99-42-019.0
Structural Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade B; or ASTM A 501.
1. Finish: Black.
Headed Stud-Type Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grade 1015 or
1020, cold-finished carbon steel with dimensions complying with AISC
Specifications.
Unfinished Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A. regular low-
carbon steel bolts and nuts.
1. . Provide round head (shoulder) bolts and nuts for all connections for
exposed/interior connections at overhead door trim.
Electrodes for Welding: Comply with AWS Code.
Structural Steel Primer Paint: Fabricator's standard rust-inhibiting primer.
Match color of existing steel or OWNER's choice.
Cement Grout: If required on job, use Portland cement (ASTM C 150,
Type I or Type Ill) and clean, uniformly graded, natural sand (ASTM C
404, Size No. 2). Mix at a ratio of 1.0 part cement to 3.0 parts sand, by
volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration.
Non-metallic Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: If required on job, use pre-
mixed, non-metallic, non-corrosive, non-staining product containing
sele.cted silica sands, Portland cement, shrinkage compensating agents,
plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with CE-CRD-C621.
1, Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,
products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
a. 100 Non-Shrink Grout (Non-Metallic); Conspec, Inc.
b, Supreme Grout; Cormix, Inc.
c. Sure Grip Grout; Dayton Superior.
d. Euco N.S.; Euclid Chemical Co.
e. Crystex; L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
f. Masterflow 713; Master Builders.
g. Sealtight 588 Grout; W. R. Meadows.
h. Propak; Protex Industries, Inc.
L Set Non-Shrink; Set Products, Inc.
J. Five Star Grout; U.S. Grout Corp.
8/17/99
05120-3
I·
I
1·
I
I
I
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Shop Fabrication and Assembly: Fabricate and assemble structural
assemblies in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate items of
structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications and as indicated
on final shop drawings.
1. Where finishing is required, complete assembly, including welding
of units, before start of finishing operations. Provide finish surfaces
of members exposed in final structure free of markings, burrs, and
other defects.
B. Connections: Weld connections, as indicated on drawings.
C. Bolt field connections, except where welded connections or other
connections are indicated.
D. Welded Construction: Comply with AWS Code for procedures,
appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding
work.
2.03 SHOP PAINTING
A. General: Shop-paint structural steel, except those members or portions of
members to be embedded in concrete. Paint embedded steel that is
partially exposed on exposed portions and initial 2 inches of embedded
areas only.
B.
C.
99-42-019.0
1. Do not paint surfaces to be welded or high-strength bolted with
friction-type connections.
2. Do not paint surfaces scheduled to receive sprayed-on fireproofing.
3. Apply 2 coats of paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after
assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it
from first.
Surface Preparation: After inspection and before shipping, clean steel
work to be painted. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and spatter, slag,
or flux deposits. Clean steel in accordance with Steel Structures Painting
Council (SSPC) as follows:
1. SP-2 "Hand-Tool Cleaning."
Painting: Immediately after surface preparation, apply structural steel
primer paint in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and at a rate
8/17/99
05120-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
B
u
I
I
I
I'
I
'I
I
I
I
to provide dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. Use painting
methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed
surfaces.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 ERECTION
A. Temporary Shoring and Bracing: Provide temporary shoring and bracing
members with strength to support imposed loads at CMU opening for
future overhead door. Remove temporary members and connections
when permanent steel plate trim is ready to be placed and final
connections are made.
B.
C.
Level and plumb individual members of structure within specified AISC
tolerances. · ·
Establish required leveling and plumbing measurements on mean
operating temperature of structure. Make allowances for difference
between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature at which
structure will be when completed and in service.
D. Touch-Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted
connections, and abraded areas of shop paint. Apply paint to exposed
areas using same material as used for shop painting.
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of
1.5 mils.
3.02 QUALITY CONTROL
A.
B.
99-42-019.0
Correct deficiencies in structural steel work that inspections and laboratory
test reports have indicated to be not in compliance with requirements.
Perform additional tests, at CONTRACTOR's expense, as necessary to
reconfirm any non-compliance of original work and to show compliance of
corrected work.
Shop Welding: Inspect during fabrication of structural steel assemblies,
as follows:
1. Certify welders and conduct inspections and tests as required.
Record types and locations of defects found in work. Record work
required and performed to correct deficiencies.
2. Perform visual inspection of all fillet welds.
8/17/99
05120-5
I
I
C. Field-Bolted Connections: Inspect in accordance with AISC specifications.
I D. Field Welding: Inspect and test during erection of structural steel as
follows:
I 1. Certify welders and conduct inspections and tests as required.
Record types and locations of defects found in work. Record work
I required and performed to correct deficiencies.
2. Perform visual inspection of all fillet welds.
I
END OF SECTION
I
•
I
I
g
0
D
I
I
I
I
I
I 99-42-019.0 8/17/99
05120-6
I
I
I
D
0
I
•
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 8
DOORS AND WINDOWS
\ \ IJCNSHO 3 \PROJECTS\ PIIOJ\ 60 J l J. ri l l \spectoc. doc
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 08331
COILING DOORS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
Furnish and install coiling doors in accordance with Drawings and as specified
herein.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
1.
2.
Provide shop drawings in accordance with Division 1 requirements. Submit to
Engineer for approval.
Indicated general construction, configurations, jointing methods, reinforcements,
anchorage methods, hardware locations, and installation details.
1.03 PRODUCT HANDLING
1.04
1.
2.
Deliver packaged material to site in original unopened containers.
Store coiling doors per manufacturer's instructions and as required to prevent
damage. Store in dry ventilated place.
3. Take all precautions necessary to protect the installed doors during construction.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1. Exterior rolling service doors shall be designed to withstand at least a twenty (20)
pounds per square foot windload.
2. All rolling service doors shall be designed to a standard maximum of 26 cycles per
day and an overall maximum of 50,000 operating cycles for the life of the door.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.01 COILING DOORS
1. All Coiling Doors shall be as manufactured by The Cookson Company, Phoenix,
Arizona or approved equal. Furnished materials shall include all curtains, bottom
bars, guides, brackets, hoods, operating mechanisms and any special features.
1. The door curtain shall be constructed of interconnected aluminum mill finish
slats conforming to ASTM A-526. The slats shall be designated by The
Cookson Company as No. 44 (measuring 3" high by 7/8" deep) consisting
08331 - 1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
of a 20 gauge exterior slat and a 20 gauge interior slat separated by 13/16"
of rigid insulation. The curtain insulation shall not produce a flame spread
greater than 25 and a smoke generation greater than 50.
The finish on the door curtain shall be mill finish.
The bottom boar shall consist of two 3/16" aluminum angles mechanically
joined together and shall include the Cookson Featheredge safety edge
system. The finish on the bottom bar shall be mill finish.
The guides shall consist of 3 aluminum angles bolted together with 3/8"
fasteners to form a channel for the curtain to travel and shall include an
extruded vinyl snap-on weatherstripping continuously along the exterior leg
of the guide. The wall angle portion shall be continuous and fastened to the -
surrounding structure with minimum 1/2" fasteners on 36" centers. The
finish on the guide angles shall be mill finish.
The brackets shall be constructed of steel not less than 1/4" thick and shall
be bolted to the wall angle with minimum 1/2" fasteners. The finish on the
brackets shall be one (1) coat of aluminum prime paint over galvanized steel.
The barrel shall be galvanized steel tubing of not less than 4" in diameter.
Oil tempered torsion springs shall be capable of correctly counter balancing
the weight of the curtain. The barrel shall be designed to limit the maximum
deflection to . 03" per foot of opening width. The springs shall be adjusted by
means of an exterior wheel. The finish on the barrel shall be one (1) coat of
bronze rust-inhibiting prime paint over galvanized steel.
The hood shall be fabricated from .040 aluminum and shall be formed to fit
the curvature of the brackets. The hood shall be corrugated every 1" along
the curvature for the entire length of the hood. The hood shall contain a
waterproof baffle to control air infiltration. The finish on the hood shall be mill
finish.
2.02 OPERATION
1. The door shall be operated at a speed of 2/3 foot per second by an open drip-proof
electric motor with gear reducer in oil bath. The motor operator shall include a
geared limit switch, and an electrically interlocked emergency chain operator. The
motor operator shall be activated by a 3 button push-button station on the inside and
a key operated pushbutton on the ouside of the building . The motor shall be size
as required by the door. The motor operator shall be mounted to the door bracket
as per manufacture instructions. All motor operators shall be U.L. listed. Provide
motor Model M103 with Watertight/Oiltight Modification (NEMA 4/12) including a
TEFC motor Model (M100), Watertight/Oiltight Control Enclosure Model (M101),
watertight/oiltight 3-button control station, nickel-plated chain and a dynamic brake
and a delay on reverse circuit (M60), factory installed.
08331 - 2
u
D
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.03
2. The service door shall include the Featheredge rolling door safety edge system as
manufactured by The Cookson Company and shall include the following features:
1.
2.
The Featheredge shall be installed on the bottom bar of the door and shall
automatically reverse the door if the device detects an obstruction in the
downward travel of the door.
The Featheredge shall consist of a rubber boot attached below the bottom
bard with an electrical switch secured to the back of the bottom bar. The
Featheredge shall operate with air wave technology and shall not r, ,Jy on
pneumatic pressure or electrical strip contacts to operate properly. The
Featheredge shall create an air wave that shall be detected and reverse the
direction of the rolling door.
3. The operation of the Featheredge shall not be subject to interferences by
temperature, barometric pressure, water infiltration, or cuts in the rubber
boot.
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
1.
2.
3.
Provide all internal power and control wiring necessary to provide a complete and
functioning system. This includes all power/control wiring between control panel
and equipment, motors, starters, sensors, and push-buttons controlled by this
equipment.
All wiring specified in this section shall comply with conduit and wiring methods
specified in Division 16.
The operator motor shall be 3-phase, 208volt. The door manufacture shall furnish
motor starter and pushbotton stations. The external pushbotton shall be key
operated to prevent unauthorized entry.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF COILING DOORS
1.
2.
3.
All Cookson Rolling Service Doors shall be installed by an authorized Cookson
Distributor.
Install the doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and standards.
Installation will be by manufacturer's authorized representative.
Doors shall be installed to provide smooth operation without any binding and shall
be erected plumb with hood shaft and slats level horizontally.
08331 - 3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.02 WARRANTY
1. All Rolling Service Doors shall be warranted for a period of twelve (12) months from
the time of building acceptance date against defects in workmanship and materials.
END OF SECTION
08331 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I \\BCNSHOJ\PROJECTS\PROJ\60Jl3.0ll\spectoc.doc
DIVISION 11
EQUIPMENT
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D
D
0
0
D
PART 1 -GENERAL
SECTION 11500
PACKAGED GAC SYSTEM
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Contractor shall furnish all labor, engineering,
drawings, materials, tools, supervision,
transportation, and equipment necessary to design,
furnish, install, test, and place into satisfactory
service the packaged granular activated carbon
(GAC) system as shown on Drawings, specified, and
required for a complete installation whether or not
shown on Drawings or specified herein. Packaged
GAC system will be factory assembled and pre-piped
to the maximum extent possible.
B. Packaged GAC system shall be furnished as a
complete factory built unit and mounted on a steel
skid. System shall be supplied complete in all
respects and shall be supplied (at a minimum) with
the following components, features, appurtenances,
and accessories.
1. Two (2) GAC vessels each with 2, 000-lb of
vapor-phase activated carbon, and operated in
series.
2. Interconnecting piping, fittings, valves,
instrumentation, and appurtenances.
3. Anchor bolts.
C. Packaged GAC system shall be complete for service
intended and shall be fabricated such that all
controls, equipment, valves, and maintenance i terns
are accessible and serviceable.
D. Manufacturer shall provide technical assistance for
design, installation, startup, training, and
performance testing as outlined herein.
E. Limitations:
1. All instrumentation and control devices,
cabinets and the like, furnished and installed
under this Section, shall be in strict
conformance with Division 16, Electrical.
2. Dimensions (height,
packaged unit shall
shown on Drawings.
\\BCNSH03\PROJ£CTS\PROJ\60313.0ll\ll500.DOC 11500-1
width,
permit
and length)
installation
of
as
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
m
I
D
I
D
0
I
I
3. Location and sizes of connections
and effluent piping of packaged
shall be as shown on Drawings.
to influent
GAC system
1. 02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01300 -Submittals
B. Section 01340 -Submittal Schedule
C. Section 01730 -Operation and Maintenance Data
D. Section 15489 -Packaged
System
Soil Vapor Extraction
E. Section 16900 -Instrumentation and Controls
1.03 REFERENCES
A. Comply with applicable provisions and
recommendations of latest edition of the following,
except as otherwise shown or specified:
1. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section
IX, Welding and Brazing Qualifications.
2. Standards for American Society for Testing and
Materials.
3. American National Standards Institute.
1.04 SUBMITTAL$
A. Engineering Design:
1. Contractor shall submit complete description
for process, design, and performance data,
including composition and sizing of GAC bed,
removal efficiencies, VOC loading capacities at
breakthrough, pressure drop across bed, etc.
Fabrication of equipment and procurement of
units shall not commence until approval of
design.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit manufacturer's illustrations,
2 .
specifications, and engineering data on all
components of packaged GAC system and carbon to
be used.
Submit drawings showing fabrication
assembly, accessories, installation
and piping and instrumentation.
methods,
details,
\ \ BCN~HO) \ rROJECT~\ !'POJV,O 3 I 3 . Cll l \ 1 l SOO. DOC 11500-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
0
0
D
0
3. Submit setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installation of anchor bolts and
other anchorages.
4. Submit Shop Drawings for
penetration of building.
5. Submit deviations from
Specifications, if any.
C. Field Test Results:
exhaust stack
Drawings and
1. Submit written report giving results of field
tests required.
D. Manufacturer's Reports:
1. Submit written report of results of each visit
by manufacturer's serviceman, including purpose
and time of visit, tasks performed, and results
obtained.
E. Certifications:
1. Manufacturer shall certify that packaged GAC
system is constructed in accordance with latest
revision of ASME code and certify that entire
system is a product of his own engineering.
F. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
1. Submit complete installation, carbon change-out
procedures, operation and maintenance manuals,
maintenance data and schedule, descriptions of
operation and spare parts information.
2 . and maintenance manuals in
the requirements of Section
and Maintenance Data.
Furnish operation
conformance with
01730, Operation
G. Previous Experience:
1. Submit names, locations, and
(reference) of at least five (5)
initallations by manufacturer.
contact person
similar system
H. Guarantee and Warranty:
1. Guarantee: In addition to manufacturer's
standard guarantee, Contractor shall include
services of factory-trained serviceman to
provide repair service to equipment for period
of one year commencing with the time equipment
is placed in continuous permanent operation.
\ \ BCNSHO] \PROJECTS\ ?ROJ\ 603 13 . en I\ I I 500 , DOC 11500-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
u
D
0
0
Service shall include cost of all replacement
parts required.
2. Warranty: Packaged GAC system shall be
warranted by manufacturer for a minimum one
year period starting from time unit is put into
permanent operation.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Manufacturer shall
have experience in production of substantially
similar equipment, and shall show evidence of
satisfactory operation of at least five (5) similar
installations.
1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver equipment and materials to Site to insure
uninterrupted progress of Work.
1. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage
which are to be embedded in concrete,
time to not delay Work.
devices,
in ample
B. Store equipment and materials to permit easy access
for inspection and identification. Keep steel
members off ground using pallets, platforms, or
other supports. Protect steel members and packaged
equipment and materials from corrosion and
deterioration.
C. Store all equipment in covered storage off ground
and prevent condensation.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.01 DESIGN CONDITIONS
A. System Description:
1. Manufacturer shall provide packaged GAC system
that is designed for satisfactory service for
continuous or intermittent operations and is
capable of achieving general operating
description presented in Part 3.04 herein. The
system will be located indoors. The location
and size of the influent and effluent GAC
system connections are shown on the Drawings.
2. Each GAC vessel shall have capacity of
2,000 pounds of vapor-phase activated carbon.
\ \ ElctlSl!\l 3 \PROJECTS\ PPOJ\ 603 I J . h 11 \ 11 ~(10 . !JOC 11500-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
E
I
D
u
0
0
0
3. Each GAC vessel shall have a 5-foot (maximum)
nominal diameter.
4. Each GAC vessel shall allow for convenient
change-out of activated carbon.
5 . GAC vessels
be in lead
3. 04.
shall be piped so that either can
or lag position as described in
6. All components of packaged GAC system shall be
installed inside building in accordance with
Drawings.
B. Flow Rates:
1. Maximum design flow rate is 500 scfm (with two
blowers)
2. Normal operating flow rate is 250 scfm (with
one blower) .
C. Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs):
1. Anticipated voes to be removed and
anticipated nominal concentrations are:
their
cis-1,2-Dichloroethene
Tetrachloroethene
Trichloroethene
15 ppm(v/v)
40 ppm(v/v)
13 ppm(v/v)
D. Exhaust Stack:
1. An exhaust stack shall be provided and extend
to at least 3 feet above roof elevation and at
least 15 feet above grade.
2. Exhaust stack shall have provisions to prevent
rain water from entering when SVE system is not
operating.
2. 02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Packaged GAC system shall
be provided by one of following manufacturers:
1. North East Environmental Products, Inc.
West Lebanon, NH.
2. Carbonair Environmental Systems, Inc.
Maple Grove, MN
3. Carbtrol Corporation
Westport, CT.
\ \ f\Ctl5!1!1 :i \l'RO.lF.C:":: ',PRO,!\ (,03 l 3. I) 1 l \ 11 ~00, DOC 11500-5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
E
4. Or approved equal.
B. Vapor-phase activated carbon to be included in each
GAC vessel shall be provided by one of following
manufacturers:
1. Carbonair Environmental Systems, Inc.
Maple Grove, MN
2. Calgon Carbon Corporation
Pittsburgh, PA
3. Or approved equal.
2.03 DETAILS OF CONSTRUCTION
A. Materials:
1. Each GAC vessel shall consist of welded steel.
Interior surface of vessel shall be coated with
material that is suitable to prevent rust and
corrosion. Coating material shall be corrosion
resistant to types of voes expected in
influent.
2. Package GAC system shall include two pressure
transmitters with local displays as shown on
Drawings and in accordance with Section 16900.
Pressure transmitters shall send signals to PLC
indicating pressure differential across each
GAC vessel. Pressure transmitters shall also
send an alarm signal to SCADA system and IC
panel that alerts operator of high pressure
differential across either GAC vessel.
3. Support legs, if applicable, shall be
constructed of structural steel angles and
shall be sized to pr·ovide adequate support of
operating weight of system. Packaged GAC
system shall be designed to resist overturning
under seismic zone 1 conditions.
4 . Skid shall be constructed from beams and steel
plates.
5. Piping shall be Schedule 40 carbon steel or
approved alternate. Pipe diameter shall be as
indicated on Drawings. Pipe supports shall be
designed and furnished by manufacturer where
necessary.
6. Valves shall be provided by manufacturer and be
product of a reputable valve manufacturer.
Valves shall be true union ball type (or
approved alternate) and provide complete range
\ \ llCN:jJIOJ \ l'R(iJEC';":; \ ?ROJ\ (;UJ l 3 . 0 11 \ 11 ~00. POC 11500-6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
7 •
8 .
9.
10.
from open full to full closed position in a 90
degree rotation.
Unions or
necessary to
and piping.
flanges shall be
allow for removal
provided as
of all valves
Each vessel shall contain inlet and outlet
piping connections, gauge connections, sample
ports, access openings, and air and pressure
relief valve fittings. Openings shall be
sufficiently sized to permit replacement of
activated carbon.
GAC vessels, skid, and all equipment shall be
constructed for easy transportation and
assembly. Lifting eyes shall be furnished at
appropriate locations to provide for handling
during shipping and installation.
Activated carbon shall be a virgin bituminous,
4 x 10 mesh.
11. Drain and plug shall be provided on each GAC
vessel for maintenance purposes.
12. Contractor shall supply all ancillary
as recommended by manufacturer for
rapid carbon replacement including,
limited to, hoses with quick connect
if applicable.
B. Special Tools and Spare Parts:
equipment
easy and
but not
couplings
1. Manufacturer shall provide all special tools
required for normal operation and maintenance
of equipment. Operation and maintenance manual
shall identify each such tool and where it is
used:
2 . Spare parts shall
labeled with name
within package.
be properly packaged and
and part number contained
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall be in strict accordance with
manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
B. Anchor bolts and other hardware required
installation shall be provided by Contractor.
\ \BCNSIIO J \PROJECTS\ PP.OJ\ 60 3 13 . 011 \ 11 :000. DOC 11500-7
for
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C. Installation shall be
for packaged soil
Section 15489.
coordinated with piping Work
vapor extraction system,
D. Contractor shall provide all material and labor for
plumbing, electrical wiring (as necessary), and
similar incidentals that may be necessary to
complete installation of equipment specified in
this Section.
3.02 START UP AND TESTING
A. Manufacturer shall provide factory representative,
knowledgeable of system and components, to inspect
final installation, supervise initial operation,
and train necessary personnel in proper operation
and maintenance for system. Service shall be
provided during a single site visit of no more than
three (3) days.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's certification that packaged GAC
system was manufactured, tested, and supplied in
accordance with this specification shall be
furnished to Engineer upon completion of Work.
3.04 GENERAL OPERATING DESCRIPTION
A. The two (2) GAC vessels will be operated in series
mode.
B. When lead GAC vessel nears estimated time of voe
breakthrough, activated carbon in lead GAC vessel
will be replaced. Former lag GAC v~ssel 0ill then
become lead GAC vessel. This alternating cycle of
lead and lag GAC vessel will be repeated as
replacement of activated carbon occurs.
C. Discharge from lag GAC
exhausted to atmosphere
outside building.
vessel will normally be
through exhaust stack piped
[END OF SECTION]
\ \BCHSBO 3 \ rROJt.CT'.;\ PROJ \ 603 l 3. 0 11 \ 11 SOO . DOC 11500-8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 15
MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
\ \l!CN!.HOJ \ PROJECT.'.nPROJ\ f.U 31 3. 0 l l \:;p.,ctoc. doc
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
u
0
0
SECTION 15010
MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials,
tools, supervision, transportation, and equipment
necessary to install and test the materials and
equipment specified in Division 15, and required
for a complete installation whether or not shown on
the drawings or specified herein.
B. The work shall include procurement, installation,
connection, and testing of the materials and
equipment specified in the sections included in
Division 15.
1.02 COORDINATION OF MECHANICAL WORK
A. The Contract Drawings are diagrammatic in showing
certain physical relationships which must be
established with the mechanical work, and its
interface with other work including utilities and
electrical work. The establishment of such
relationships and coordination of the mechanical
work include, but is not necessarily limited to,
the following:
1. Perform the mechanical work in conformity with
the Contract Drawings, shop drawings,
specifications, product data, and other
requirements, so that the finished, complete
mechanical systems will function as an
integrated system, properly interfaced with
electrical and other work.
2. Locate operating and control equipment properly
to provide easy access, and arrange entire
mechanical work with adequate access and
clearance for operation and maintenance.
3. Coordinate procurement of mechanical equipment
to ensure proper interface with electrical
work. Refer to appropriate sections of
Division 16, Electrical, and electrical
drawings for the power characteristics
available for equipment motors.
4. Coordinate the connection of mechanical work to
existing utilities.
\\BCNSHU3\PROJECTS\PROJ\60313.0ll\150l0.DOC 15010-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
o·
n
I
I
I
I
I
5. Prep~re and submit shop drawings prior to
purchase, fabrication, and installation of any
equipment for which several elements of
mechanical and/or electrical work must be
sequenced and positioned with precision to fit
the available space. Coordination drawings
must show scaled actual physical dimensions
required for installation. The scale must be
one that provides sufficient detail and
clarity.
6. Prepare and submit pipe/valve fabrication
drawings (shop drawings) for approval prior to
purchase, fabrication and installation of any
piping and valves. Drawings must show scaled
actual physical dimensions required for
installation. The scale must be one that
provides sufficient detail and clarity.
1.03 PIPING SYSTEMS
A. The Contract Drawings show the piping system by
means of process piping and instrumentation
diagrams and physical piping drawings. The process
piping and instrumentation diagrams show schematics
of the piping system. The physical piping drawings
show the general arrangement and physical layout of
the piping system. No attempt has been made to
show every fitting and accessory on the physical
layout of the piping system. Provide additional
fittings and accessories as required to accommodate
existing piping, conduit, equipment, and
structures. Maintain aisle clearances and
equipment access in routing the piping system. All
physical piping drawings should have dimensions
field verified before installation.
B. If information on the piping and instrumentation
diagram differs from information on the physical
piping drawings, the information on the process
piping and instrumentation diagram shall govern,
except where other Contract Documents call out
details that do not appear on process piping and
instrumentation diagrams.
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND SYMBOLS
A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies, Codes, and
. Standards: The requirements of the current issue
of the laws, ordinances, codes and standards of the
authority having jurisdiction over the work
constitute minimum requirements for the materials,
equipment and workmanship to be provided. Where
\ \HCtlSHl/3\PROJEC':'~\Pf<DJ\60) 13.011\15010. DOC 15010-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
the Contract Documents have more stringent
requirements, they shall supersede the governing
laws, ordinances, codes, and standards.
B. Referenced Specifications and Standards: The
1.05
latest issue, amendment, addendum or revision of
specifications and standards published by the
following sources govern materials, equipment, and
workmanship to be provided when referenced in the
Contract Documents. References to these standards
in the Contract Documents are identified by the
indicated abbreviations:
AISC
ANSI
ASTM
AWWA
American Institute of Steel Construction
American National Standards Institute
American Society for Testing and Materials
American Water Works Association
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Equipment for the individual systems shall be
supplied by a single manufacturer with single-
source responsibility. The manufacturer shall be
qualified and experienced in the design,
construction, installation, and operation of
equipment for the purpose required and shall
regularly produce such systems.
B. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Manufacturer shall
have experience in the production of substantially
similar equipment and shall show evidence of
satisfactory operation in at least five
installations.
C. Contractor shall warrant that the process and the
equipment provided shall conform to the design
requirements specified herein, provided, however,
that the warranty shall be effective only to the
extent that the design conditions are met.
D. In the event that the warranty is breached, the
Owner shall notify Contractor. As soon as
practicable after receiving notification,
Contractor shall take all necessary steps, at no
cost to the Owner, to fulfill its warranties
hereunder including but not limited to, repairing
and/or replacing any equipment causing the system
not to produce the conditions warranted herein;
and/or correct, alter, modify or change the process
to enable the system to produce the conditions
warranted herein.
\ \flr:tlGHIJJ\PROJE:CC: \PROJ\603 l 3. D 11\1501(1. DOC 15010-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver equipment and materials to the site to
insure uninterrupted progress of the Work.
1. Contractor shall
anchorage devices,
concrete, in ample
deliver anchor bolts and
which are to be embedded in
time to not delay that Work.
B. Store equipment
for inspection
members off the
other supports.
equipment and
deterioration.
and materials to permit easy access
and identification. Keep steel
ground using pallets, platforms or
Protect steel members and packaged
materials from corrosion and
C. Store all equipment in covered storage off the
ground and prevent condensation.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Provide products conforming to all specified,
scheduled, or indicated performance requirements
under project service including, but not limited
.to, material compatibility, site elevation above
sea level, ambient temperature and humidity range;
utility supply conditions; service
pressure/temperature ratings; installation.
B. Where any project service condition would adversely
affect product continuous service performance
capabilities, modify product as necessary to obtain
continuous service performance required by the
Contract Documents.
2.02 ELECTRIC AND INSTRUMENTATION
A. Instrument connections to mechanical items which
come into contact with process fluids shall be of
the same type material as indicated in individual
Division 15 specifications for the service
involved, unless otherwise noted on the Contract
Drawings or Division 16.
\ \BCN~II03\PROJECTS\Pl'OJ\603 l 3. (1 l l \ l ~U l (!. UOC 15010-4
D
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 INITIATION OF INSTALLATION
A. Inspection
1. Prior to a,11 work of this Section, the
Contractor shall inspect the installation area
to see that the installed work of other trades
has progressed to the point where this
installation may properly commence.
B. Approvals
1. Prior to all work in this Section, the
Contractor shall have submitted and received
approval from the Engineer for all associated
materials specified herein shown on the
Drawings, and referenced in the Related
Sections.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Install all materials, equipment, and
2 .
components in accordance with this Section, the
Contract Drawings, the individual equipment
specifications, and the manufacturer's
installation instructions and/or approved shop
drawings.
Components
accordance
shall
with
recommendations.
be installed in strict
the manufacturer's
3. Contractor responsibilities include,
not limited to, the following:
but are
a. Prepare, package, ship, receive, inspect,
handle, and store materials and equipment in
accordance with Section 01600, Material and
Equipment.
b. Unpack materials,
parts.
equipment and component
c. Field check dimensions shown on the Contract
Drawings and approved shop drawings. Resolve
any discrepancies before starting the
installation.
d. Set, connect supports, level,
furnish miscellaneous supports
\ \llr:tl:;",1103\ Pf<.OJECT:\PPOJ\G!IJ 13. 0 11 \ l ~O 10. t,QC 15010-5
align, tag
and hangers,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.I
I
I
I
I
I
and check all equipment and component parts
according to the manufacturer's installation
instructions or recommendations.
e. Test equipment and mechanical assemblies
according to the applicable codes and the
manufacturer's recommendations.
f. Accomplish all installation without damage to
equipment, roadways, buildings, and/or
structures. Immediately repair, to original
conditions, any damaged portions.
g. Protect and maintain equipment and mechanical
assemblies until installed, tested, and
accepted according to the provisions and
requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Miscellaneous Supports:
supports for mechanical
components as required
Contract Drawings.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Install structural steel
systems,
and/or as
equipment, and
shown on . the
A. A manufacturer's certification that the product was
manufactured, tested, and supplied in accordance
with this specification shall be furnished to the
Engineer upon completion of the work.
3.04 ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS
A. The electrical provisions of mechanical work are
limited to motors and other electrical devices
indicated to be furnished integrally with
mechanical work, unless otherwise indicated under
individual Division 15 specifications.
3.05 LABELS AND TAGS
A. Provide identification markers permanently attached
to all instruments, control valves, regulators, and
equipment items incorporated into piping systems
shown on Process Piping and Instrumentation
Diagram(s) Markers shall be engraved plastic,
minimum 2 inches square, with alpha-numeric
designation per Process Piping and Instrumentation
Diagrams in 3/16-inch high characters. The
following applies to labeling and tags:
1. Do not use any adhesive on polymer lines and
equipment.
\ \BCN~ll03\PIWJECTS\PHOJ\ 60313. 011 \ 1~010. DOC 15010-6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. All valve I.D. tags to be white letters on
black background.
3. Contractor to submit sample of label and tags
for Owner's approval prior to fabrication.
3 . 0 6 CLEANING
A. General: Clean debris, oil, grease, dirt, and
other foreign matter from all mechanical work
including, but not limited to, piping, valves,
equipment, and accessories incorporated into
mechanical systems.
B. Standards: Conduct cleaning, flushing,
sterilization operations in conformance
specifications, established schedules,
operating constraints.
and
with
and
C. Protection: Provide temporary screens, strainers,
filters, bypasses, or other devices required to
protect pumps, equipment, or accessories in
mechanical systems operated before cleaning is
complete. Repair any damage resulting from failure
to properly clean mechanical system or to provide
adequate protective devices.
[END OF SECTION]
\ \BCNSHO) \ PROJECTS \PROJ\ 603 l 3. 0 l l \ l ~O l O . DOC 15010-7
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1·
I
I
I
SECTION 15060
PIPING SYSTEMS AND APPURTENANCES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Per Section 15010, the Contractor shall furnish all
items necessary for a complete installation of the
piping, fittings, valves, pressure gauges, pipe
sleeves, and appurtenances whether or not shown on
the drawings or specified herein.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01340 -Submittals
B. Section 01730 -Operation and Maintenance Data
C. Section 11500 -Packaged GAC System
D. Section 15010 -Mechanical General Provisions
E. Section 15140 -Pipe Hangers and Supports
F. Section 15260 -Piping Insulation
G. Section 15481 -Packaged Air Sparging System
H. Section 15489 -Packaged Soil Vapor Extraction
System
I. Section 16900 -Instrumentation and Controls
J. Division 16 -Electrical
1. 03 SUBMITTAL$
A. Shop Drawings
1. Prior to obtaining any equipment in connection
with this section, the Contractor shall submit
detailed shop drawings and descriptions of all
piping, valves, fittings, joints, gauges, pipe
sleeves, and appurtenances in accordance with
Section 01300 -Submittals.
2. The submittal shall include complete
information and instruction relating to the
storage, handling, installation, and inspection
of the valves, piping, gauges, etc.
3. Submit a
certification
\ \BCNSHOJ\ PROJECTS\ PP.OJ\ 6031 J . 011\15060. DOC
copy of
that all
15060-1
the manufacturer's
delivered materials
I
I
I
I
I
I
I ,,
I
I
I
comply with the requirements of the specified
standards.
B. Experience
1. Contractor shall
experience with
particularly with
methods.
C. Field Test Results
submit supplier's/installer's
similar piping systems
respect to fusion joining
1. Contractor shall submit a written report giving
the results of the required field tests.
D. Manufacturer's Reports:
1. Contractor shall submit a written report of the
results of each visit by a manufacturer's
serviceman, including purpose and time of
visit, tasks performed, and results obtained.
E. Operation and Maintenance Manuals
1.04
1. Contractor shall submit complete installation,
operation and maintenance manuals (where
applicable), maintenance data and schedules,
descriptions of operations, and spare parts
information.
F. Guarantee
1. Guarantee: In addition to the manufacturer's
standard guarantee, the Contractor ·shall
include the services of a factory-trained
serviceman to provide repair service to the
equipment for a period of one yea_r commencing
with the time the equipment is placed into
continuous permanent operation. The service
shall include the cost of all replacement parts
required during the interval.
2. Warranty: The materials and equipment
specified herein shall also be warranted by the
manufacturer for a five year (5) period.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. See Section 15010, Mechanical General Provisions.
1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. See Section 15010, Mechanical General Provisions.
\ \8CNSHO 3 \ PROJECTS\ PROJ\ 60313 . 0 l l \ 150 60. DOC 15060-2
I
I
I
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2. 01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Pipe, Fittings, and Valves
1. Asahi/America, Malden, MA
2. Harrington Industrial Plastics, Inc., Chino, CA
3. Or Engineer approved equal.
B. Pressure/Vacuum Gauges
1. Rosemount Inc., Chanhassen, MN
2. Dwyer, Michigan City, IN
3. Ametek/U. S. Gauge
4. Or Engineer approved equal
C. Wall Castings and Sleeves
1. Clow
2. Or Engineer approved equal
D. Pipe Labels
1. Lab Safety Supply
2. Or Engineer approved equal
2. 02 MATERIALS
A. General
1. Contractor shall have the option of HOPE, or
carbon steel as the pipe material for the air
sparging piping, and shall have the option of
HOPE, or polypropylene as soil vapor extraction
piping material.
2. Equipment, or portions thereof, that are
exposed to vapors with the following
constituents and concentrations shall be
constructed of materials that will not
deteriorate as a result of these conditions.
\ \BCNStHlJ \PROJECTS\ PROJ \ 60313.011 \ 1 ~(J ~(J • DOC 15060-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Influent
2.03
Parameter
voes (ppmv)
cis-1,2-Dichloroethene
Tetrachloroethene
Trichloroethene
PIPING AND FITTINGS (Polypropylene)
15
40
13
A. Piping and fittings for the air sparging and soil
vapor extraction lines located inside the building
may be polypropylene. Contractor shall install the
system in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
B. Polypropylene pipe and fittings shall be formulated
of polypropylene conforming to ASTM 04101, SOR 11,
butt fusion type. Pipe shall be 150 psi rated in
all sizes. Heat fusion welding shall be in
conformance with manufacturer's recommendation.
C. Fittings shall be industrial heavy duty hub style.
D. Connections at valves, pumps, and major equipment
or packaged units shall be flanged or true union.
E. Flanges shall be one piece solid design or two-part
van stone type which utilize tapered, serrated face
and full face gasket techniques for joining and are
compatible with ANSI B16.5 Class 150 metal flanges.
F. Unions shall be 0-Ring seal type
interchangeable components with true union
for maximum system versatility.
having
valves
G. Unions intended for joining dissimilar materials
shall be transitional type, which utilize
components of two dissimilar materials, joined with
an 0-Ring to absorb the thermal expansion
coefficient differential.
H. Valves, unions, and flanges shall be pressure rated
at 150 psi for water service at 73°F, non-shock and
have a minimum burst requirement of 3.3 times the
rated pressure.
I. Fittings and pipe shall be clearly marked with
manufacturer's name or trademark, material, ASTM
number, NSF seal of approval, nominal pipe size,
schedule size with pressure rating in psi, and
manufacturing date code.
\ \BCNSHOJ \PROJECTS\ PP.OJ\ 603 I 3 . 0 11 \ 1 SO 60. DOC 15060-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
J. All pipes and fittings shall be of the nominal
diameters shown on the Contract Drawings.
K. The installer shall have at least five years of
experience with these systems and materials.
2.04 PIPING AND FITTINGS (HOPE)
A. Piping and fittings for the air sparging and soil
vapor extraction lines located inside the building
may be HOPE. Contractor shall install the system
in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
B. Materials under this section shall meet the
requirements of ASTM D3350-Specification for
Polyethylene Plastics Pipe and Fittings Material.
C. HOPE pipe shall be SDR 11.
D. Fittings shall be fusion welded in accordance with
ASTM D2657.
E. Tie-ins to other piping systems where butt
is not applicable shall be with HOPE
adapters. Mechanical compression or clamp
fittings will not be acceptable.
fusion
flange
style
F. Fittings and pipe shall be clearly marked with
manufacturer's name or trademark, material, ASTM
number, NSF seal of approval, nominal pipe size,
schedule size with pressure rating in psi for water
at 7 3 ° F, and manufacturing date code.
G. The installer shall have at least five years
experience with these systems and materials.
of
2.05 PIPING AND FITTINGS (Carbon Steel)
A. Piping and fittings for the air sparging lines
located inside the building may be carbon steel.
Contractor shall install the system in strict
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Materials under this section shall
requirements of ASTM A53, Specification
and Seamless Steel Pipe.
C. Carbon steel pipe shall be Schedule 40.
meet the
for Welded
D. Fittings and pipe shall be clearly marked with
manufacturer's name or trademark, material,
schedule number, nominal pipe size.
\ \flC!ISHO 3 \PROJECTS\ PRO,J\ 60J l 3. 0 11 \ l SO ~O. DOC 15060-5
I
I
I
I
g
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
g
E. All pipes and fittings shall be of the schedules
and nominal diameters as shown on the Contract
Drawings.
F. The installer shall have at least five years of
experience with these systems and materials.
2 .06 VALVES
A. Valves installed in pipelines shall be
independently from the pipeline on
approved by the Engineer or as shown
Drawings.
supported
supports
on ·the
B. Ball valves to be used shall be true-union ball
valves, manufactured of polypropylene with Standard
O-ring seals made of Vi ton® or similar, seats and
shafts bearings made of Teflon®.
C. Check valves to be used shall be polypropylene
swing check valves.
D. Globe Valves shall be a polypropylene globe valve,
in-line, with a maximum body pressure of 90 psi and
a temperature rating of 120°F. Valves 2-inch or
smaller shall have a standard threaded bonnet and
shall have NPT threaded connections. Valves larger
than 2-inch shall be flanged. Threaded valves
shall be provided with unions on either side to
allow for easy removal. Valve flow coefficients
(Cv) shall be as follows and shall meet or exceed
ASME/ANSI B16.24 requirements.
Valve Diameter
1. 25 inch
2 inch
3 inch
4 inch
Cv
18
25
78
115
E. Flow control valve shall be a polypropylene globe
valve, in-line, with a maximum body pressure of
90 psi. Valve shall have a standard threaded
bonnet. Valve shall have an electric actuator.
F. Valves unless otherwise specified shall be pressure
rated for 150 psi service at 73°F water, non-shock
and have a minimum bursting rating of 3.3 times the
rated working pressure.
\ \BCUSHO 3 \PROJECTS\ PROJ\ 603 l J. 011 \ 15060, DOC 15060-6
D
D
D
0
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
G. Valves shall be clearly marked with manufacturer's
name, size, materials of construction, and bear the
NSF-PW SE seal.
H. Solenoids for Sparge Well Valves
1. Materials: All materials of construction shall
2 .
have maximum resistance to chemical attack from
environmental conditions such as solvent fumes,
acid and caustic fumes, sea water atmosphere,
etc. All exposed materials of construction
shall have maximum resistance to splashes and
spills of acids, caustics, solvents, salts,
etc. Exposed materials of construction should
be a chemically resistant material such as
thermoplastic, glass reinforced thermosetting
plastic, or equivalent, which will not crack,
chip, or peel (under normal usage).
Voltages:
available
standard.
All electric solenoids shall be
in 120 VAC 60 Hz, single phase as
3. Solenoids shall be capable of receiving an
input signal from the PLC or other control
device to open/close the valve. Solenoids
shall have the ability to fit to the size of
the valve.
4. General
a. All electric solenoids shall be .available
with NEMA 4 covers.
b.
c.
All electric solenoid covers shall have a
minimum of 1/2 inch drilled and tapped hole
for electrical conduit as standard and have
sufficient material for a 3/4 inch drilled
and tapped hole for electric conduit as an
option.
All electric solenoids shall have a "fail-
closed" design.
d. Overall dimensions of all electric solenoids
shall be minimal to permit installation in
areas where space is at a premium.
I. Vacuum relief valves shall be
Engineer approved equal, have
connection, working pressure
at less than 0.5 inch vacuum.
a Watts brand N36 or
a 0.5 inch male inlet
of 200 psi, and open
The valve shall have
bronze construction and be NPT threaded.
J. Pressure relief valves shall be a simple lever type
Val-Matic Model 15VC or Engineer approved equal,
\ \BCNSH03 \PROJECTS\ PFOJ\ 603 l J . 0 l I\ I !;(1(,0, r,oc 15060-7
I
0
D
D
u
D
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.07
have a O. 5 inch NPT inlet, a vacuum check, and a
working pressure of 150 psi. Body and cover shall
be cast iron. With the exception of the viton
orifice button, the leverage mechanism, float, and
all other internal trim shall be of stainless steel
construction.
K. All valves shall be lockable.
PRESSURE GAUGES
A. Pressure gauges shall be direct reading pressure
gauges for air service with accessories as shown or
specified in Section 16900. The pressure sensor
shall be a Dwyer, Model 604 D or approved equal.
Pressure gauges shall be capable of measuring
pressure/vacuum ranges from Oto 100 inches W.C.
B. Cases shall be aluminum, stainless steel or
phenolic. Finishes shall be black except for
stainless steel. Cases shall have heavy acrylic
dial covers.
C. Accuracy
1. Gauges smaller than 4-1/2 inch,
scale
D. Movements
1. Brass or stainless steel
2. Adjustable for recalibration
E. Stop Cocks
1. Brass with lever or tee handles
F. Pulsation Dampener
1. Brass construction
2% of full
2. Adjustable by pin size or pin location
G. Diaphragm Seals
1. Stainless steel housing
2. 316 stainless steel diaphragm
3. Glycerin or silicone filled gauges shall be
factory assembled
\ \BCNSHD 3\ PP.OJECTS \ PROJ\ 60 3 I 3 . 0 11 \ I '..O 60, DOC 15060-8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. 08 DRIP TRAPS
A. Drip traps shall be provided at each low point
along the common extraction header. Drip traps
will be field located based on the installed header
profile. Each low point along the header shall be
fitted with a tee. A 1-inch nominal diameter pipe
shall be routed from the tee to an elevation easily
accessible for routine draining of the trap.
B. Drip traps shall be located so as not to interfere
with normal operations in the building.
C. Drip traps shall be securely anchored.
D. Shand & Jurs, Hillside, IL,
Model 97100, or approved equal.
manual drip trap
2. 09 PIPE SLEEVES
A. Pipe sleeves shall be provided for each pipe which
penetrates a building wall or ceiling unless noted
otherwise on the Drawings. Sleeve shall mean a
casting or fabricated special insert installed in
the wall, or ceiling through which a pipeline
passes.
B. Pipe sleeves shall also be provided for the
conduits penetrating walls.
C. Sleeves shall be solid cast or ductile iron
castings or fabricated from Schedule 40 steel pipe.
D. Pipe sleeves shall be provided
when installed in exterior walls
shown.
with water stops
and elsewhere as
E. Water stops for fabricated
least the same thickness
minimum of two inches.
sleeves
as the
shall
sleeve
be
and
at
a
2.10 PIPE LABELS
A. Pipe labels shall include arrow markers and write-
on pipe marker·s. Arrow markers shall be self-
adhering, vinyl arrow tape type. Pipe markers
shall be self-adhering blank labels capable of
being custom labeled using a permanent marker.
Color shall be consistent with ANSI
recommendations.
B. Pipe labels shall be provided to mark each pipe run
identified on the drawings at a minimum of two (2)
locations.
\ \BCUSHO 3 \ PROJEC7Z \ l"ROJ\ 60) I) . (J l l \ l ~0 GO. DOC 15060-9
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.11 MISCELLANEOUS
A. All other materials, not specifically described,
but required for a complete and operating
installation of the work of this section shall be
new and first quality.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 INITIATION OF INSTALLATION
A. Inspection
1. Prior to all
Contractor shall
to see that the
has progressed
installation may
work of this Section, the
inspect the installation area
installed work of other trades
to the point where this
properly commence.
B. Approvals
1. Prior to all work in this Section, the
Contractor shall have submitted and received
approval from the Engineer for all associated
materials specified herein shown on the
Drawings, and referenced in the Related
Sections.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General
1.
2 .
3 .
4 .
The ins tall a tion of piping,
gauges, and pipe sleeves shall
with the configuration shown
and Shop Drawings.
valves, pressure
be in accordance
on the Drawings
Components shall be installed in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations.
Pipelines shall be carefully erected and neatly
arranged and run where shown on the Drawings.
Supports and
support the
safety of
specified.
anchors shall be adequate to
pipe with a minimum factor of
5 and for the test pressure
5. Field cuts of pipe shall be in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
6. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer of
deviations from the Drawings for installation
of pipe, valves, gauges, etc. prior to
performing the work. Deviations that are
\ \BC!ISHO 3 \PROJECTS\ PROJ\ 603 l 3 . 0 11 \ I ',11 (,Q . DOC 15060-10
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
performed without consent by the Engineer are
subject to removal and replacement in
accordance with the Drawings by the Con tractor
at no additional cost to the Owner.
7. Proposed deviations of installed pipe and
equipment will be evaluated by the Engineer to
determine the affect on compressors, blowers,
etc. The Engineer will make recommendations
based on this evaluation.
8. Place warning tape above buried piping per
Specification Section 02220.
B. Pipe Labels
1. Pipe labels
Contractor in
direction.
shall be
accordance
installed
with the
by the
Engineers
2. Each pipe label shall include a write-one label
with arrow tape wrapped around the pipe at each
end of the blank label. Labels shall be marked
by the Contractor and include the identifier as
shown on the Drawings and the nominal pipe
diameter (e.g., CEH -6").
3. Labels shall be installed at a minimum of
two ( 2) locations for each pipe run. Locations
for each label shall be determined by the
Engineer. Labels shall be installed so that
they are clearly visible from open floor areas.
C. Testing
1. all labor,
water, and
out the
The Contractor shall furnish
equipment, test connections, vents,
materials necessary for carrying
pressure and leakage tests.
2. The piping shall be low pressure ( 15 psi or
less) air tested per the recommendations of the
manufacturer. The Contractor shall submit a
testing plan for the piping based upon the
guidelines and recommendations of the
manufacturer for approval by the Engineer.
3. All testing shall be witnessed by the Engineer.
4. Equipment in or attached to the pipes being
tested shall be protected. Any damage to such
equipment during the test shall be repaired by
the Contractor at his expense.
5 . Pipes, fittings, etc.
and harnessed before
\ \BCNSHOJ\PROJE:CTS\PROJ\60313. 011 \l ~060. DOC 15060-11
must be properly braced
the pressure is applied.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.03
6.
7 •
8 •
9.
10.
Thrust restraining devices which will become a
part of the system must also be tested at the
test· pressure.
If the lines fail the test, the Contractor
shall explore for the cause of the leakage and
after repairs have been made, the line shall be
retested. This procedure shall be repeated
until the pipe passes the testing. All
retesting shall be performed at the
Contractor's expense.
Test pressure shall be held on the piping for a
period of at least 60 minutes unless a longer
period is requested by the Engineer.
At the completion of the test, the pressure
shall be released at the furthest most point
from the point of application.
All exposed pipe shall be examined during the
test and all leaks, defective materials, or
joints shall be repaired or replaced before
repeating the tests. All deficiencies shall be
corrected at the Contractor's expense.
Upon completion
Contractor shall
that they operate
of the installation, the
operate all valves to show
without binding or strain.
11. The Contractor shall correct any valve
indicated by failure of the
All deficiencies shall be
Contractor's expense.
deficiencies as
above tests.
corrected at the
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. The Engineer shall inspect all pipe, fittings, and
related materials specified herein after
installation for observation of alignment,
elevation, and condition as it relates to the
Contract Drawings. Pressure tests shall not be
performed on the piping system or portion thereof
prior to inspection and approval of the system
installation by the Engineer. Written approval
from the Engineer shall be received prior to
performing each pressure test.
[END OF SECTION]
\ \ BCll::;HIJJ \ PROJECT:::\ PPOJ\ 603 l 3 . 011 \ l ~rJ 60. DOC 15060-12
u
0
0
0
D
B
u
u
m
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
a
SECTION 15140
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED HEREIN
A. Pipe hangers and supports required to properly and adequately support
aboveground piping systems.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A.
8.
C.
The term "pipe hangers" refers to rigid-type hangers, including s\andard hangers
and stanchion components.
The term "supports" includes auxiliary steel members required for:
1. Intermediate supports between building structural steel members.
2. Intermediate supports between structural concrete slabs.
3. Fabrication of brackets, braces, and multiple bank supports.
4. Fabrication of anchors, restraints, and guides.
The term "pipe" includes pipes, tubing, and conduit.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. The following submittals, as defined in Section 01340, Submittals are required:
1. Manufacturer's Product Data: Pipe hangers and accessories; continuous
supports.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Pipe hangers and supports shall be as provided by 8-Line Systems, Inc., Uni-
Strut Corporation, or approved equal.
8.
C.
D.
All hanger materials shall be in accordance with MSS SP-58.
All hangers shall be suspended by means of hanger rods. Perforated band iron
or flat wire (strap iron) will not be permitted.
All hangers and supports shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with MSS
SP~58.
99-42-019.0 08/17/99
15140-1
0
D
0
D
0
D
D
D
I
•
I
I
I
E. Rods, nuts and washers may be electro-galvanized:
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
GENERAL
A. All hangers and supports shall be installed in accordance with MSS SP-69 and
shall meet the applicable requirements of BOCA, 1993 Edition.
1. Provide pipe hangers, pipe supports, anchors, and guides to eliminate
excessive vibration and to control movement due to thermal expansion
and/or contraction of the piping system and connected equipment.
2. Support piping from building structure. Support piping independent of the
ceiling sheathing and ductwork. At no time shall the hangers and/or
supports overload the roof structure.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C-type clamps for suspension of hangers are acceptable for use on steel
beams if a retaining clip is used. Exception: All piping 2" diameter and
larger shall be hung below beam centerline with welded beam
attachments.
Piping and tubing shall not be supported by other piping or tubing.
Bolts of pipe flanges, equipment, etc., shall not be used for the anchoring
of pipe supports.
Determine intended movement by noting location of anchors, restraints,
guides, and/or equipment connections.
All bolts and studs used for pipe supports and hangers shall be double
nutted.
8. Provide lateral supports as required to prevent movement of pipes.
9. All horizontal suspended piping shall be supported by adjustable wrought
steel, clevis type hangers .
10. Hang piping straight and level.
CONNECTIONS TO BUILDING STEEL
A.
B.
Weld or bolt support attachments parallel to and on the centerline of the web of
the building structural steel.
Use welders qualified in accordance with Section 15060, Piping Systems. Weld
½" stiffener plate to structural steel flanges which are less than ½" thick. Weld
½" stiffener plate to structural steel flanges where hanger rods are greater than
1-1 /2" in diameter.
99-42-019.0 08/17/99
15140-2
I
I
I
I
I
D
0
D
u
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.03
3.04
3.05
C.
D.
Use bolts and nuts conforming ASTM A307, Grade B, when connections are
bolted to building structural steel. Drill the bolt holes required to support
attachments. Do not flame cut bolt holes.
Provide intermediate structural steel as required where building structural steel
spacing exceeds the maximum dimensions given below.
CONNECTIONS TO BUILDING CONCRETE
A. Where concrete inserts are not used, bolt support attachments to structural
concrete using expansion anchors. Expansion anchors shall be non-lead-type.
Use care to prevent damage to structures during and after installation.
SUSPENSION MEMBERS
A. Install suspension members so they are plumb and location is maintained as
shown on the drawings when piping is at operating conditions. Limit vertical
misalignment to 4 degrees when piping is at ambient conditions.
B.
C.
D.
Provide intermediate structural members as required to limit suspension member
length to a maximum of 8 feet. This approach shall be reviewed by the
ENGINEER.
Limit loads on suspension members to those given in the Manufacturer's
Standardization Society, MSS SP-58, Table 3.
Thread length on threaded hanger rods shall not exceed 5 rod diameters. Use of
"all thread" rods is limited to single pipe supports with hanger lengths of less than
18" and pipe sizes under 6" diameter.
SUPPORT SPACING
A. Maximum support spacing for all metallic pipes shall not exceed the
requirements of MSS SP-69.
B.
C.
For flanged pipe, provide a minimum of one hanger per pipe section. Also,
provide a hanger at each change in direction, at each fitting, and at each trap.
Provide intermediate riser supports where necessary to maintain a maximum
spacing of 30 feet.
Provide continuous support for thermoplastic piping under 2 inches. Support all
thermoplastic piping 2 inches or larger in accordance with the following:
SIZE
2"-4"
6"-12"
MAX. SUPPORT SPCG (FT)
5
7
99-42-019.0 08/17/99
15140-3
a
I
I
I
u
I
0
0
D
R
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.06
3.07
PAINTING
A. Prime-paint all carbon steel pipe hangers, rods, supports, auxiliary steel, or other
devices required by this Section, in accordance with the requirements of Section
09900, Painting.
MISCELLANEOUS
A.
B.
Install hanger relative to mechanical equipment in such a manner that equipment
will not carry any pipe load.
Size pipe hangers and stanchions to fit the outside diameter of uninsulated
piping. NOTE: Uni-Strut is not an acceptable hanger material. For insulated
piping, size hanger for oversize due to insulation.
END OF SECTION
99-42-019.0 08/17/99
15140-4
I
I
D
u
.o
H
I
D
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15260
PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials,
tools, supervision, transportation, and equipment
necessary to install freeze protection measures for
aboveground exterior piping as specified herein, as
shown on the Drawings, and as necessary for a
complete installation.
B. The work includes, but
following:
Aboveground exterior
appurtenances in and
extraction wells.
is not
piping,
around
limited to the
valves, and
the soil vapor
C. Contractor shall define in submittals and provide
method of protecting aboveground exterior piping,
valves, and appurtenances from freezing conditions.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS:
A. Section 01010 -Summary of Work
B. Section 01300 -Submittals
1. 03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit plan
aboveground
appurtenances
for providing freeze
exterior piping,
(i.e. insulation, etc.)
protection
valves,
of
and
B. Submit supporting information including but not
limited to manufacturer's literature, drawings,
relevant calculations, R-value, and temperature
ratings for the proposed freeze protection systems.
C. Submit manufacturer's instructions and installation
procedures.
D. Contractor shall submit a written guarantee that
the freeze protection system will function
sufficiently for a period of at least 10 years.
E. Submit references for five similar installations.
\ \BC/I:;Hr1 3 \ PRO,JECTS\ PROJ\ 60313.011 \ 152 60. DOC 15260-1
I
I
D
u
0
0
D
D
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.01 INSULATION
A. Pipe insulation shall conform to the following
requirements:
1. Pre-fabricated
2. Weather proof
3. Metal jacketed to resist physical damage
4. Insulation shall allow operation of valving
controls and access to readouts
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 FREEZE PROTECTION SYSTEMS
A. Owner's Representative shall approve of all freeze
protection plans prior to conduct of the work.
B. Following approval of the freeze protection plan,
Contractor shall provide all required equipment and
materials to perform the work.
[END OF SECTION]
\ \BCllSHIJJ \ PROJECTS\ PROJ\ 6031J.011\15260, OOC 15260-2
I
I
I
D
0
D
D
B
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15481
PACKAGED AIR SPARGING SYSTEM
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Contractor shall furnish all labor, engineering, drawings, materials, tools, supervision, transportation, and equipment necessary to design, furnish, install, test and place into satisfactory service a packaged air sparging system as shown, specified and as required for a complete installation whether or not shown on Drawings or specified herein. Packaged air sparging system shall be factory assembled, pre-wired, and pre-piped to maximum extent possible.
B. Packaged air sparging system shall be skid-mounted, pre-wired, package type unit. System shall be supplied complete in all respects and shall be supplied (at a minimum) with following components, features, and appurtenances:
1. Air compressor with air receiver tank.
2. Influent and effluent piping, fittings, valves, and appurtenances.
3. Air filter.
4. Instrumentation and controls.
5. Anchor bolts.
C. Packaged air sparging system shall be complete for service intended and shall be fabricated such that all controls, equipment, valves, and maintenance items are accessible and serviceable.
D. Manufacturer shall provide technical assistance for design, installation, startup, training, and performance testing as outlined below.
E. Limitations:
1. All instrumentation and control devices, cabinets and the like, furnished and installed under this Section, shall be in strict conformance with Division 16, Electrical.
\ \BC11SH03\PROJE:CTs\rROJ\ 60313. 011 \l 54 81. DOC 15481-1
I
I
u
0
D
D
D
D
I
I
I
I
I
2. Dimensions (width and
sparging system shall
shown on Drawings.
length)
permit
of packaged air
installation as
3. Location and sizes of connections to
and effluent piping of packaged air
system will be as shown on Drawings.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01300 -Submittals
B. Section 01340 -Submittal Schedule
influent
sparging
C. Section 01730 -Operation and Maintenance Data
D. Section 15060 -Piping Systems and Appurtenances
E. Division 16 -Electrical
1. 03 REFERENCES
A. Comply with applicable provisions and
recommendations of latest edition of following,
except as otherwise shown or specified:
1. Standards for American Society for Testing and
Materials.
2. National Electric Code.
3 .
4 .
Standards of National Electrical
Association (NEMA).
Institute
Engineers.
of Electrical and
Manufacturers
Electronic
5. American National Standards Institute.
6. Uniform Building Code.
7. American Institute of Steel Construction.
8. Underwriters Laboratory (UL).
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Engineering Design:
1. Contractor shall submit a complete description
of process, design, and performance data
including airflow rate and pressure ranges.
Contractor shall submit detailed design
calculations and literature describing air
\ \BCNSHOJ\PROJECTS\PROJ\60313.011\I~481. rioc 15481-2
I
I
u
D
D
D
0
I
D
I
I
I
I
sparging system and appurtenances.
of equipment and procurement
components shall not commence until
design.
Fabrication
of system
approval of
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit manufacturer's illustrations,
specifications, engineering data, and
performance curves.
2. Submit· drawings showing fabrication methods,
assembly, accessories, installation details,
piping, instrumentation, and wiring diagrams.
3 . Submit setting drawings,
directions for installation
other anchorages.
templates and
of anchor bolts and
4. Submit deviations from Drawings and
Specifications, if any.
5. Submit drawings of control panels, furnished in
accordance with requirements of Division 16,
Electrical.
C. Field Test Results:
1. Submit a written report giving results of field
tests required.
D. Manufacturer's Reports:
1. Submit a written report
visit by manufacturer's
purpose and time of visit,
results obtained.
of results of each
serviceman, including
tasks performed, and
E. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
1. Submit complete installation, operation
maintenance manuals, maintenance data
schedules, description of operation, and
parts information.
and
and
spare
2. Furnish operation and maintenance manuals in
accordance with requirements of Section 01730,
Operation and Maintenance Data.
F. Previous Experience:
1. Submit names,
(reference) of
installations
\ \BCNSHO 3 \ PHOJECT::; \ PF\OJ\ 60 3 lJ . 011 \ 154 Bl . DOC
locations, and
at least five (5)
by manufacturer.
15481-3
contact person
similar system
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
G. Guarantee and Warranty:
1. Equipment Guarantee: In addition to
manufacturer's standard guarantee, Contractor
shall include services of factory-trained
serviceman to provide repair service for
equipment for period of one year commencing
with the time equipment is placed in continuous
permanent operation. This service shall
include cost of all replacement parts required.
2. Warranty: Packaged air sparging system shall
be warranted by the manufacturer for minimum of
one year. Where longer standard warranty
periods are available, manufacturer shall
provide such a period.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Equipment for packaged air sparging system shall be
supplied by a single manufacturer with single-
source responsibility. Manufacturer shall be
qualified and experienced in design, construction,
installation, and operation of equipment for the
purpose required and shall regularly produce such
systems.
B. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Manufacturer shall
have experience in production of substantially
similar equipment and shall show evidence of
satisfactory operation in at least five (5) similar
installations.
C. In event that warranty is breached, Owner shall
notify Contractor. As soon as practicable after
receiving notification, Contractor shall take all
necessary steps, at no cost to Owner to fulfill its
warranties hereunder including but not limited to,
repairing and/or replacing any of the equipment
causing the system not to produce effluent
conditions warranted herein; and/or correct, alter,
modify, or change process to enable the system to
produce the effluent conditions warranted herein.
1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. See Specification Section 15010.
\ \8CU$HO 3 \ PROJECTS\ PROJ\ 603 13 , 0 11\l548 l • DOC 15481-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.01 DESIGN CONDITIONS
A. System Description:
1. Manufacturer shall design packaged air sparging
system that provides clean air to air sparging
wells shown on Drawings. System shall be
designed for satisfactory service for
continuous or intermittent operation. System
will be located inside existing plant building.
Location and size of the influent and effluent
connections are shown on Drawings.
2. All components of packaged air sparging system
shall be installed inside existing plant
building in accordance with Drawings. Portion
of air intake which is exposed to atmosphere
and seasonal weather conditions shall be
designed for outdoor service.
B. Design Criteria:
1. Packaged air sparging system design criteria
are as follows:
a. Design Discharge Pressure: 50 to 60 psig
b. Design Delivery Flow: 25 to 35 scfm
c. Compressor Type: oilless or non-lubricated;
reciprocating or rotary screw
C. Operating Conditions:
1. Location: Indoors (Except portions as described
in Part 2.0lA of this Section)
2. Ambient Temperature Range: 20°F to 120°F
2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Packaged air sparging system shall be supplied by
one of following manufacturers:
1. North East Environmental Products, Inc.
Lebanon, NH.
2. Carbonair Environmental Systems
Maple Grove, MN.
3. Ingersoll Rand
Nashville, TN.
\ \0CNSH03\?ROJECTS\ PP0J\60313.011 \ 1~4 9 l, DOC 15481-5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
0
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
4. Or approved equal.
2.03 DETAILS OF CONSTRUCTION
A. General:
1. Packaged air sparging system shall be complete,
including all internals, lifting lugs,
anchoring lugs, couplings and flanges for
instrumentation and plumbing connections, air
pressure gauge, air inlet and outlet, and other
appurtenances necessary for safe and efficient
operation of system.
2. Packaged air sparging system shall be
fabricated in such a way as to facilitate
shipping, erection, and repair. System should
be sized considering building and overhead door
dimensions.
3 .
4 .
Packaged air sparging system shall be
manufactured with pipe supports to facilitate
inlet and outlet piping. Manufacturer shall
design and install all pipe supports associated
with system.
Anchor bolts and plastic anchor
shall be provided by Contractor.
shall be sized per
recommendations.
bolt sleeves
Anchor bolts
manufacturer's
5. Inlet and outlet piping shall be provided with
unions and/or flanges appropriately located to
facilitate easy removal of valves and other
system components.
B. System Accessories:
1. Air receiver tank shall be provided with
packaged air sparging system. Tank shall be
sized appropriately for specified air delivery.
2. Pressure gauges with transmitters shall be
provided as shown on Drawings.
3 .
4 .
Integral filters shall be provided with
packaged air sparging system to achieve a
particle-free air stream. (Filter shall be
sized to provide at least one-years service
between routine filter maintenance.}
An inlet
required,
silencer shall be supplied,
to limit noise to 80 dBA at 3 feet.
if
\ \ 11r:tl~!l113 \ PROJECTS\ PJ<O,l\ 60 3 l 3 . 0 l l \I~~ Bl . DOC 15481-6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
8
I
I
I
I
I
C. Compressors and Motors:
1. Air compressor shall be an oilless or non-
lubricated, reciprocating or rotary screw type
with air receiver tank. Air shall enter
compressor through intake and be discharged to
common sparge header. Piping connections to
packaged air sparging system shall be in
accordance with material and diameters shown on
Drawings.
2 .
3.
4 .
5.
6.
7 .
8 •
Compressor shall be designed with noise
suppression. Compressor noise shall not exceed
80 dBA at 3 feet.
Compressor housing and base shall be heavy
gauge aluminum or carbon steel suitable for
temperatures up to 250 degrees F. Housing
shall be continuously welded in compliance with
ASME Section 9 standards.
Inlet duct shall be provided to allow
compressor to draw air from outside building.
Inlet duct shall be fabricated of the same duct
material as specified above including a
flexible connection. Screen shall be installed
over exterior portion of inlet duct sized to
provide protection from intake of animals and
debris while not hindering performance of
compressor.
Motor shall be TEFC motor with service factor
of 1.15. Motor shall be a high efficiency and
energy conserving design, manufactured in
accordance with NEMA specifications, NEMA B
torque requirements, and Class F
non-hydroscopic insulation. Motor shall be
manufactured by a recognized manufacturer.
Motor shall be sized to operate at, at least
125 percent of maximum rated brake horsepower.
Motor shall be equipped with overload and
thermal protection.
Motor shall operate on 208 volt, 3 phase power.
All motor starters and associated
circuits shall be provided in
sparging system control panel.
motor control
packaged air
\ \l:lCNSllO)\PROJECTS\PROJ\60313, 011 \ 1548 l, DOC 15481-7
If
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D. Skid:
1. Entire air sparging system including motor and
local controls shall be mounted on a
manufacturer supplied pre-fabricated skid.
Skid shall be constructed of structural grade
carbon steel and coated with enamel paint.
Skid shall be constructed to allow for forklift
access.
2. Skid system shall have all required electrical
and control connection points.
E. Special Tools and Spare Parts:
1. Manufacturer shall provide all special tools
required for normal operation and maintenance
of equipment. Operation and maintenance manual
shall identify each such tool and where it is
used.
2 . Spare parts shall
labeled with name
within package.
F. Control System:
be properly packaged and
and part number contained
1. Packaged air sparging system shall be provided
with controls and instrumentation as shown on
Drawings, described in Section 16900, and
specified herein. Controls shall be panel
mounted and enclosed in NEMA 4 panel mounted on
skid, or on an adjacent package system skid.
Contractor shall supply one local instrument
control (IC) panel for all package systems and
remote instrumentation. In addition to hand
switches, IC panel shall house an expandable
PLC, autodialer, and shall have SCADA operator
interface.
2. Pressure gauge shall be provided to measure air
pressure at discharge. Pressure ranges and
type of gauge shall be as recommended by
manufacturer for packaged air sparging system.
3.. Low and high air pressure set points shall be
provided and shall provide control as described
in Section 16900. Lower pressure set point
shall deactivate compressor and provide signal
to system PLC for alarming purposes as
described in Section 16900. Pressure ranges
and set points shall be as recommended by
manufacturer for packaged air sparging system.
\ \ BCUSJ!OJ \ PROJECT5\ PROJ\r,fJ 313 . U I l \ l ':i4 81 . DOC 15481-8
I
I
I
u
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.04
4. As stated in Part 2.0lA(l) herein, system shall
be designed for both continuous and
intermittent operation. Controls shall be
provided such that this operating requirement
can be achieved. When extraction flow from
soil vapor extraction system is discontinued,
air compressor shall shut down. Air compressor
shall be reactivated upon startup of soil vapor
extraction system.
G. Power Supply:
1. The power supply to be provided at site will be
2 08 volt, 3-phase, 60 Hertz supply. Packaged
air sparging system shall be designed to
operate with this power supply and shall have
necessary grounding equipment.
SCADA CONTROL SYSTEM INTERFACE
A. Signal Input/Output (I/O) Type Designations:
(AI) =
(AO) =
(DI)
(DO) =
4-20 mA Input to PLC
4-20 mA Output from PLC
Discrete contact input to PLC
Discrete contact output from PLC
B. Provide terminal strip connections and associated
equipment necessary to provide following I/O
signals to PLC system. Coordinate all Work
associated with SCADA system compatibility prior to
submittal of IC panel drawings:
I/O Type
DI
DO
AI
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
Description
Compressor on/off status
Compressor on/off signal
Discharge pressure
A. Anchor· bolt locations shall be field determined
using template provided by manufacturer.
B. Installation shall be in strict accordance with
manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
C. Anchor bolts and other hardware required
installation shall be provided by Contractor.
\ \ BCNf,HOJ \PROJECTS\ PROJ\ 60 313 , 011\1540 l . DOC 15481-9
for
I
I
I
I
I
I
l
I
I
D. Contractor shall provide all material and labor for
plumbing, electrical wiring, and similar
incidentals that may be necessary to complete
installation of packaged air sparging system
specified in this section.
E. Electrical and pipe connections shall be installed
in accordance with Division 16 as shown on
Drawings, and allow for sufficient access operation
and maintenance purposes.
F. All connections to packaged air sparging system
including piping, ducts, etc. shall be fitted with
necessary unions, flexible couplings, etc.
3.02 START UP AND TESTING
A. Manufacturer shall provide factory representative,
knowledgeable of system and components, to inspect
final installation, supervise initial operation,
and train necessary personnel in proper operation
and maintenance of system. Service shall be
provided during a single site visit of no more than
three (3) days.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's certification that
sparging system was manufactured,
supplied in accordance with this
shall be furnished to Engineer.
3.04 OPERATION
packaged air
tested, and
specification
A. System shall operate as described in Section 16900.
Contractor shall verify with Manufacturer that
operation of system will function as described.
[END OF SECTION]
\ \!lr:11~110 3\ PROJECT:;\ PROJ \ (;0] I 3 . 0 l ! \ 1 ~4 S l . DOC 15481-10
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15489
PACKAGED SOIL VAPOR EXTRACTION SYSTEM
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Contractor shall furnish all labor, engineerin~,
drawings, materials, tools, supervision,
transportation, and equipment necessary to design,
furnish, install, test and place into satisfactory
service packaged soil vapor extraction (SVE) system
as shown, specified, and as required for a complete
installation whether or not shown on Drawings or
specified herein. Packaged system shall be factory
assembled, pre-wired, and pre-piped to maximum
extent possible.
B. Packaged SVE system shall be skid-mounted, pre-
wired, package type unit. System shall be supplied
complete in all respects and shall be supplied (at
a minimum) with following components, features, and
appurtenances:
1. Two (2) Regenerative Blowers
2. Influent and Effluent Piping, Fittings, Valves,
and Appurtenances
3. Moisture Separator
4. Particulate Filter
5. Bleed-in Valve with Silencer
6. Instrumentation and Controls
7. Anchor Bolts
C. Packaged SVE system shall be complete for service
intended and shall be fabricated such that all
controls, equipment, valves and maintenance i terns
are accessible and serviceable.
D. Manufacturer shall provide technical assistance for
design, installation, startup, training, and
performance testing as outlined below.
E. Limitations:
1. All instrumentation
cabinets and the like,
!': \PR0J\60313. 011\15489. 1.>0C 15489-1
and control devices,
furnished and installed
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
under this Section, shall be in strict
conformance with Division 16, Electrical.
2. Dimensions (width and length) of packaged SVE
system shall permit installation as shown on
Drawings.
3 . Location and sizes of connections
and effluent piping of packaged
shall be as shown on Drawings.
RELATED SECTIONS
Section 01300 -Submittals
Section 01340 -Submittal Schedule
to influent
SVE system
Section 01730 -Operation and Maintenance Data
Section 11500 -Packaged GAC System
Section 15010 -Mechanical General Provisions
F. Section 15060 -Piping Systems and Appurtenances
G. Division 16 -Electrical
1. 03 REFERENCES
A. Comply with applicable provisions and
recommendations of latest edition of following,
except as otherwise shown or specified:
1. Standards for American Society for Testing and
Materials.
2. National Electric Code.
3. Standards of National Electrical Manufacturers
Association (NEMA).
4. Institute
Engineers.
of Electrical and Electronic
5. American National Standards Institute.
6. Uniform Building Code.
7. American Institute of Steel Construction.
8. Underwriters Laboratory (UL).
r: \ PPO,J\60313. 011 \ l ~~ 89. DOC 15489-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Engineering Design:
1. Contractor shall submit a complete description
of process, design, and performance data
including flow rates, vacuum generated, and
pressure drop through packaged SVE system
components. Contractor shall submit detailed
design calculations and literature describing
packaged SVE system and appurtenances.
Fabrication of equipment and procurement of
components shall not commence until approval of
design.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit manufacturer's illustrations,
specifications, engineering data, and
performance curves.
2 . Submit drawings showing fabrication
assembly, accessories installation
methods,
details,
wiring piping and instrumentation, and
diagrams.
3. Submit setting drawings, templates and
directions for installation of
other anchorages.
anchor bolts and
4 . Submit deviations from Drawings and
Specifications, if any.
5. Submit drawings
accordance with
Electrical.
C. Field Test Results:
of control panels,
requirements of
1. Submit written report giving the
field tests required.
D. Manufacturer's Reports:
furnished in
Division 16,
results of
1. Submi.t written report of results of each visit
by manufacturer's serviceman, including purpose
and time of visit, tasks performed, and results
obtained.
E. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
1. Submit complete installation, operation and
maintenance manuals, maintenance data and
r: \PROJ\6031 3. 0 l l \ lSHI~. DOC 15489-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
schedules, description of operation, and spare
parts information.
2. Furnish operation and maintenance manuals in
accordance with the requirements of Section
01730 -Operation and Maintenance Data.
F. Previous Experience:
1. Submit names, locations, and
(reference) of at least five (5)
installations by manufacturer.
contact person
similar system
G. Guarantee and Warranty:
1. Equipment Guarantee: In addition to
manufacturer's standard guarantee, Contractor
shall include services of factory-trained
serviceman to provide repair service for
equipment for period of one year commencing
with time equipment is placed in continuous
permanent operation. This service· shall
include cost of all replacement parts required.
2. Warranty: Packaged SVE system shall also be
warranted by manufacturer for a minimum of one
year. Where longer standard warranty periods
are available, manufacturer shall provide such
a period.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Equipment for packaged SVE system shall be supplied
by a single manufacturer with single-source
responsibility. Manufacturer shall be qualified
and experienced in design, construction,
installation, and operation of equipment for
purpose required and shall regularly produce such
systems.
B. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Manufacturer shall
have experience in the production of substantially
similar equipment and shall show evidence of
satisfactory operation in at least five (5) similar
installations.
C. In the event that warranty is breached, Owner shall
notify Contractor. As soon as practicable after
receiving notification, Contractor shall take all
necessary steps, at no cost to Owner to fulfill its
warranties hereunder including but not limited to,
repairing and/or replacing any of equipment causing
system not to produce effluent conditions warranted
herein; and/ or correct, alter, modify, or change
!': \ i'l'.Ci.)\f,OJ l 3. OJ 1 \l ~4P, ~. DOC 15489-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
'I
I
I' ,,
I
process to enable system to produce effluent
conditions warranted herein.
1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. See Specification Section 15010.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.01 DESIGN CONDITIONS
A. System Description:
1. Manufacturer shall design packaged SVE system
that will remove volatile organic compounds
(VOCs) anticipated at Site. System shall be
designed for satisfactory service for
continuous or intermittent operation. System
will be located inside the existing plant
building. Location and size of influent and
effluent piping connections are shown on
Drawings.
2. All components of packaged SVE system shall be
installed in building in accordance with
Drawings.
B. Design Criteria:
1. Packaged SVE system design criteria are as
follows:
Design Inlet Vacuum
to System
Design Discharge
80 in. W.C.
Backpressure from System 15 in. W.C.
Maximum Pressure Drop of
Packaged SVE System Due to
Piping, Moisture Separation,
and Particulate Filter 5 in. W.C.
Altitude of Installation 1,000 feet above
mean sea level
Inlet Air Temperature 60 to 90°F
Inlet Air Humidity 50 to 100% RH
P:\PROJ\60313.011\1~489.DOC 15489-5
I
I
I
I
I
I'
1,
II
I
Flow as Installed
-With two blowers
-With one blower
Blower Type
500 scfm(minimum)
250 scfm(minimum)
Regenerative
C. Operating Conditions:
1. Location -Indoors within equipment area.
2. Ambient Temperature Range -20°F to 120°F
2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Packaged SVE system shall be supplied by one of
following manufacturers:
1. North East Environmental Products, Inc.
Lebanon, NH.
2. Carbonair Environmental Systems
Maple Grove, MN.
3. J.E. Gasho and Associates, Inc.
West Chester, PA. ·
4. Carbtrol Corporation
Westport, CT.
5. Or approved equal.
2.03 DETAILS OF CONSTRUCTION
A. General:
1.
2.
All materials of construction in contact with
vapors, including miscellaneous hardware, shall
be compatible with following voes and nominal
concentrations in influent.
cis-1,2-Dichloroethene
Tetrachloroethene
Trichloroethene
15 ppm(v/v)
40 ppm(v/v)
13 ppm(v/v)
Packaged SVE system · shall be complete,
including all internals, filters, bleed-in
valve, lifting lugs, anchoring lugs, couplings
and flanges for instrumentation and plumbing
connections, air pressure/vacuum gauge, air
inlet and outlet, and other appurtenances
necessary for safe and efficient operation of
system.
I': \PROJ\60313, 011 \15489. DOC 15489-6
I
I
I
I
a
·I
I
'i'
i
' j,
'g,
1.
I
.I
3.
4 .
5 .
Packaged
a way as
repair.
building
SVE system shall be fabricated in such
to facilitate shipping, erection, and
Sections should be sized considering
and overhead door dimensions.
Packaged SVE system shall be manufactured with
pipe supports to facilitate influent line.
Manufacturer shall design and install all pipe
supports associated with packaged system.
Anchor bolts and plastic anchor
shall be provided by Contractor.
shall be sized per
recommendations.
bolt sleeves
Anchor bolts
manufacturer's
6. Inlet and outlet piping shall be provided with
unions and/or flanges appropriately located to
facilitate easy removal of valves, and other
system components.
B. System Accessories:
1.
2 .
3 .
4 .
5 •
6.
Moisture separator shall
packaged SVE system and
provide SO-gallon capacity,
be provided
shall be sized
minimum.
with
to
Particulate filter shall be provided with
packaged SVE system and shall be sized to
provide one year's operation between scheduled
maintenance. Filter media shall be selected to
protect blowers from particulates.
Instrumentation for monitoring flow,
and electrical current
shown on Drawings.
as part of packaged
temperature, pressure,
shall be provided as
Instrumentation included
SVE system shall be
manufacturer.
as recommended by
Sample ports shall be provided as shown on
Drawings to allow manual and automated sampling
of SVE influent and effluent.
Automatic air bleed-in valve with silencer and
manual bypass · shall be provided with packaged
SVE system. Bleed-in shall be piped from
outside building.
Heat exchanger shall be provided on blower
outlet to provide an air stream temperature of
less than 100°F to packaged GAC system.
P; \l'ROJ\60JIJ. 01 l \J 548'J. lJOC 15489-7
I
I
I
I
C. Blowers and Motors:
1. Blowers shall be regenerative type. Air shall
enter blower following moisture separator and
particulate filter and be discharged from
blower to packaged GAC system. Piping
connections to packaged SVE system shall be in
accordance with material and diameters shown on
Drawings.
2. Manufacturer shall provide space for, and
install two (2) regenerative type blowers on
skid. Second blower is for additional capacity
(500 scfm total) should it be needed in future.
3 .
4 .
5 .
6.
7.
8.
9.
Blowers shall be
suppression. Blower
designed with
noise shall not
noise
exceed
80 dBA at 3 feet.
Pedestal base for each blower shall be
fabricated of steel with epoxy coating.
Blower motors shall have service factor of
1.15. Motors shall be designed for high
efficiency and energy conserving, manufactured
in accordance with NEMA specifications, NEMA B
torque requirements, and Class F
non-hydroscopic insulation. Motors shall be
manufactured by recognized manufacturer.
Blower motors shall be sized to operate at, at
least 125 percent of the maximum operating
brake horsepower. Motors shall be equipped
with overload and thermal protection.
Blowers shall be tested and rated according to
Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA)
Standard 210 and ASHRAE Standard 51 prior to
delivery. Blowers shall also be certified by
AMCA and shall be licensed to bear AMCA seal.
Blower housings
aluminum or
temperatures up
wheels shall
compliance with
and bases shall be heavy gauge
carbon steel suitable for
to 250 degrees F. Housings and
be continuously welded in
ASME Section 9 standards.
All motor starters and associated
circuits shall be provided in
system control panel.
motor control
packaged SVE
P: ,r110J\60J 1 3. 011 \ 15409. noc 15489-8
c-1
I
I
I
I
_,
I
I
I
D
I
I
I
D. Skid:
1. Entire packaged SVE system, including blower,
moisture separator, filtei:, and local controls,
shall be mounted on manufacturer-supplied
pre-fabricated skid. Skid shall be constructed
of structural grade carbon steel and coated
with enamel paint.· Skid shall be constructed
to allow for forklift access.
2. Skid system shall have all required electrical
and control connection points.
E. Special Tools and Spare Parts:
1. Manufacturer shall provide all special tools
required for normal operation and maintenance
of equipment. Operation and maintenance manual
shall identify each such tool and where it is
used.
2 . Spare parts shall
labeled with name
within package.
F. Control System:
be properly packaged and
and part number contained
1. Packaged SVE system shall be provided with
controls and instrumentation as shown on
Drawings, described in Section 16900, and
specified herein. Controls shall be panel
mounted and enclosed in a NEMA 4 panel mounted
on skid. Contractor shall supply one local
instrument control (IC) panel for all package
systems and remote instrumentation. In
addition to hand switches, IC panel shall house
expandable PLC, autodialer, and shall have
SCADA operator interface with remote access
capability.
2. Pressure, temperature, and flow gauges shall be
provided to measure airflow within SVE system
(PLC shall use pressure, temperature, actual
flow, and barometric data to calculate standard
flow in scfm) . Type of gauges shall be as
recommended by manufacturer for packaged SVE
system.
3. Pi tot tube type airflow meter with transmitter
located on SVE exhaust piping shall be provided
to measure airflow being discharged from
system. Flow ranges and location of meter
shall be as recommended by manufacturer.
r; \ PROJ\ r,()313. 01 l \ 154119. DOC 15489-9
I
I
u
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
4. Packaged SVE system shall be provided with two
level switches located in moisture separator
reservoir to control functions as described in
SGction 16900. High water level (HWL) switch
shall be provided to signal CLC for alarming as
described in Section 16900. High high water
level (Hf!WL) shall be provided to deactivate
blower in event of high water level condition
in moisture separator reservoir. HHWL switch
shall also provide signal to PLC for alarming
as described in Section 16900. Level switches
shall be as recommended by manufacturer for the
specified SVE system. System controls shall be
provided by UL listed shop.
5. Pressure transmitter shall be provided at
blower inlet and shall provide control as
described in Section 16900. Pressure ranges,
set points, and type of transmitters· shall be
as recommended by manufacturer for packaged SVE
system.
G. Power Supply:
1. Power supply to be provided at Site will be
208 volt, 3-phase, 60 Hertz supply. Packaged
SVE system shall be designed to operate using
provided power supply and shall include
necessary grounding equipment.
2.04 SCADA CONTROL SYSTEM INTERFACE
A. Signal Input/Output (I/O) Type Designations:
(AI) =
(AO)
(DI)
(DO) =
4-20 mA Input to PLC
4-20 mA Output from PLC
Discrete ~ontact input to PLC
Discrete contact output from PLC
B. Provide terminal strip connections and associated
equipment necessary to provide following
input/output signals to PLC/SCADA system.
Coordinate all Work associated with SCADA single
compatibility prior to submittal of control panel
drawings:
r: ,r~OJ\ (,0313, Ol l \l 548',I. DOC 15489-10
I
I
n
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I/0 Type
DI
DO
DI
DI
AI
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
Description
Blower on/off status (one DI for each
blower)
Blower on/ off signal ( one DI for each
blower)
Moisture, separator high water level
switch
Moisture separator high high water
level switch
Blower inlet pressure, temperature, and
flow
A. Anchor bolt locations shall be field determined
based on mounting template provided by
manufacturer.
B. Installation shall be in strict accordance with
manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
C. Anchor bolts and other hardware required for
installation shall be provided by Contractor.
D. Contractor shall provide all material and
plumbing, electrical wiring, and
incidentals that may be necessary to
installation of packaged SVE system.
labor for
similar
complete
E. Electrical and pipe connections shall
in accordance with Division 16 as
Drawings, and allow for sufficient
operation and maintenance purposes.
be installed
shown on
access for
F. All connections to packaged SVE system including
piping, ducts, etc., shall be fitted with necessary
unions, flexible couplings, etc.
3. 02 START UP AND TESTING
A. Manufacturer shall provide factory representative,
knowledgeable of packaged SVE system and
components, to inspect final installation,
supervise initial operation, and train necessary
personnel in proper operation and maintenance of
system. Service shall be provided during single
site visit of no more than three (3) days.
P: \l'kO,l\6031). 01 l \ I $4~9. DOC 15489-11
0
n
u
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.03 FIELD QUALITY .CONTROL
3.04
A. Manufacturer's certification that packaged SVE SJ:::+::cm Wil.S manufactured, test<ed, and suppl.L~u in accordance with thiR specification shall be furnished to Engineer.
OPERATI•:;N
A. Packaged SVE system shall operate as Section 16900. Contractor shall manufacturer that operation of the function as described.
[END OF SECTION)
described in
verify with
system will
P: \PROJ\60Jl 3, 01 l \ l ~489. uOC 15489-12
D
I
I
•
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 16
ELECTRICAL
\ \UCll~ll 03 \ rkOJECT!: \ Pf'.OJ\ 60 3 1 1. fl l l \ r.f>~Ctoc. doc
0
I
D
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16010
ElASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Primary electrical service and distribution.
B. Bus Duct
C. Wiring devices.
D. Lightning protection system.
E. Motor starters.
F. Cable Tray.
G. Uninterruptible power systems.
H. Wiring for built-in and Owner furnished equipment.
I. Access panels for installation under other Divisions.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with applicable local, state, and federal codes.
B. Warrant electrical Work against faulty material or Workmanship in accordance with
Division 1. If the Project is occupied or the systems placed in operation in several
phases at the request of the Owner's Representative, then the warranty of each system
or piece of equipment used, shall begin on the date each system or piece of equipment
was placed in satisfactory operation and accepted as such, in writing, by the Owner's
Representative. The use of building equipment for temporary service and testing does
not constitute the beginning of the warranty.
C. Equipment and material provided under this Division shall be periodically inspected and
serviced by competent mechanics. This function becomes the responsibility of the
Owner's Representative when the system is accepted by the Owner's Representative.
The one year material and Workmanship warranty is not intended to supplant normal
inspection or service and shall not be construed to mean the Contractor shall provide
free service for normal maintenance items such as periodic lubrication and adjustment
due to normal use, nor to correct without charge, breakage, maladjustment, and other
trouble caused by improper maintenance.
D. Turn over electrical equipment provided under this Division to the Owner's
Representative in lubricated condition. Include instructions on further lubrication in the
operating manual.
99-42-019.0 8/18/99
16010 -1
B
0
D
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
E. Upon completior. of contract and progressively as work proceeds, clean-up and remove
Jirt, debris and scrap materials. Maintain premises neat ar.d clc::r.. P.otect and preserve
access to energized equipment at all times. Clean items with factory finishes. Touch-up
minor damage to surfaces; refinish entire piece of equipment when sustained major
damage. Use only factory supplied paints of matching color and formula.
1.03 STANDARDS
A. Perfonm Work specifie? in Division 16 iri accordance with standards listed below. Where
these Specifications are more stringent, they shall take precedence. In case of conflict,
obtain a decision from the Engineer,.
1. NFPA-70: Natiqnal Electrical Code.
2. NFPA-780: Lightning Protection Code.
3. SBC: Standard Building Code.
4. City of Statesville Electrical Code.
5. State of North Carolina Electrical Code.
6. NFPA 30 Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code.
7. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code
8. NFPA 241 Standard for Safeguarding Building Construction and Demolition
Operations.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with provisions of Division 1.
8. Submit shop Drawings as called for in the Sections that follow.
C. Submit dimensioned layout showing location of all electrical equipment in:
1. Draw room layouts to scale, with equipment locations shown therin. Clearances
shall be in accordance with NEC and local codes.
2. Electrical equipment submittals will be rejected without dimensioned room or
equipment location layouts.
D. Certain Division 16 equipment is specified with microprocessor or PC based controls or
interfaces. All products and systems shall be Year 2000 compliant. Submit certification
that all products, components and system are Year 2000 compliant.
1. Year 2000 compliant means that a product will manage dates and date
calculations properly prior to, during and after the calendar Year 2000. This
includes leap year calculations, date rollover, date-based logs, reports and
calculations.
1.05 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Provide manuals in accordance with Division 1.
99-42-019.0
8/18/99
16010 -2
I
0
D
1.06 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Insofar as possible, deljver items in manufacturer's original unopened packaging. Where
this is not practical, cover items with protective materials to keep them from being
damaged. Use. care in loading, transporting, unloading, and storage to keep items from
being damaged.
8. Store items in a clean dry place and prated from damage.
1.07 RECORD DRAWINGS
I A. Comply with provisions of Division 1.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.01 NOT APPLICABLE
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 COORDINATION
A. Visit site and ·observe conditions under which Work must be performed. No subsequent
allowance will be made. because of error or failure to obtain necessary information to
completely estimate and perform Work required by these documents.
8. Examine Specifications and Drawings to be familiar with. items which require electrical
connections and coordination. Electrical Drawings are diagrammatic and shall not be
scaled for exact sizes.
3.02 TESTS
A. On completion of Work, installation shall be completely operational and entirely free from
grounds, short circuits, and open circuits. Perform operational tests as required to
demonstrate substantial completion of the Work: Balance circuits so that feeders to
panels are not more than 10% out of balance between phases with all available load
energized and operating. Furnish all labor, materials and instruments for above tests.
8. Furnish the Owner's Representative and the Engineer a copy of test reports, including
identification of each circuit and readings recorded. Include the main service ground
resistance test as described in Section 16450. Include ampere readings of all panels and
major circuit breakers.
C. Prior to final observation and acceptance test, all electrical systems and equipment shall
be in satisfactory operating condition including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Electrical distribution system.
2. Electric motors for all equipment.
3. Lightning Protection System.
99-42-019.0 8/18/99
16010 -3
a
0
3.03 INSPECTION FEES AND PERMITS
D A Obtain and pay for all necessary permits and inspection fees required for electrical
installation.
D
END OF SECTION
m
m
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I 99-42-019.0 B/18/99
16010 -4
I
D
I
D
D
E
m
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16050
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED UNDER OTHER DIVISIONS
A. Foundations and pads required for equipment furnished under this Division.
B. Field painting, except sucti painting as is required to maintain shop coat painting and
factory finish painting.
C. Flashing of conduits into roofing and outside walls.
D. Plumbing equipment.
1.02 RELATED WORK -OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Comply with provisions of D·ivision 1.
B. Equipment and materials furnished shall be listed by UL or other nationally accredited
testing laboratory where available. When listing is not available for a piece of equipment,
it shall be submitted in accordance with Drawings and Specifications and shall be
approved by the authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Specifications and Drawings indicate name, type and/or catalog number of materials and
equipment to establish standards of quality. Submittals shall be based on the standards
specified. The standards.should not be construed as limiting competition.
2.02 FUSES
A. Provide fuses as scheduled on Drawings for switchboards, power panelboards and
disconnecting switches.
B. Acceptable manufacturers: Bussmann; Gould Shawmut; Littlefuse, Inc.
C. Provide fuses of one manufacturer only. Place the same type fuse in each pole of a
switch.
D. Use these types:
1. Class RK5-Time Delay-1/10A-600A; Power panels and fusible switches, motor
loads.
2. Class RK1-Fast Acting-1A-600A; Power panels and fusible switches, other loads.
99-42-019.0 8/18/99
16050-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
E. Provide a fuse storage cabinet, mounted on wall in main electrical room, complete with
one set(3 fuses) of spare fuses for each type and rating installed in this Project.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 COORDINATION
A.· · Equipment shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation Where
conflicts occur between Contract Documents and these recommendations, a ruling shall
be requested before proceeping with such Work.
'
3.02 CUTTING AND PATCHING
' A. Repair or replace routine damage caused by cutting in performance of Work under this
Division.
B. Correct unnecessary damage caused due to installation of electrical Work, brought
about through carelessness or lack of coordination.
C. Holes cut through existing floor slabs shall be core drilled with drill designed for this
purpose. All openings, sleeves, and holes in slabs between floors shall be properly
sealed, fire proofed and water proofed.
D. Repairs shall be performed with materials which match existing materials and be
installed in accordance with appropriate sections of these Specifications.
3.03 IDENTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT
A. Identify the following electrical equipment:
1. Panelboards.
2. Safety switches and disconnects.
3. Contactors and motor starters.
B. Identify electrical equipment with permanently attached black. phenolic plates with 1 /4"
white engraved lettering on the face of each, attached with two sheet metal screws.
Colors shall match existing scheme presently used throughout the facility.
C. Starters and relays connected under this Division shall be identified whether furnished
under this Division or under other Divisions.
D. Panel board identification plates shall identify the panel name and branch of the electrical
system. ·
3.04 WARNING SIGNS
A. Provide warning signs called for by NFPA 70, by OSHA and by the list included below.
99-42-019.0 8/18/99
16050-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. Use Seton Name Plate Company products, 1 O" x 7" size, pressure-sensitive (PSPL) for
indoor use, 30 ga. baked enamel for outdoor use (30 BE) with style numbers shown
below.
C. Danger -Electrical Hazard -Authorized Personnel Only, Style No. 161.
1. Main electrical room(s),
END OF SECTION
99-42-019.0 8/18/99
16050 .3
m
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
. . .
SECTION 16110
RACEWAYS AND CONDUIT SYSTEMS
A. Comply with the provisions of Sections 1601 O and 16050.
B. Provide a complete conduit system with associated couplings, connectors, and fittings.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 16190: Supporting Devices and Hangers.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittal of products furnished under this Section are not required.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. EMT, IMC, and Rigid conduit shall be hot dipped, galvanized, or electro galvanized steel
by Allied, General Electric, Republic, Triangle, or Wheatland.
B. PVC conduit shall be Carlon, Schedule 40 or Schedule 80, 90 degrees C. rated.
C. Associated couplings, connectors and fittings shall be steel as manufactured by Raco or
equivalent.
D. Erickson couplings shall be used where neither length of conduit can be rotated.
E. EMT box connectors shall be set screw or compression fittings.
F. Conduit, connectors, couplings and fittings shall be UL listed and labeled.
2.02 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)
A. Use Electric Metallic Tubing (EMT) where drawings call for conduit to be:
1. Concealed in walls.
2. Installed exposed, above 6 feet.
2.03 INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT (IMC)
A. Use Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC) where drawings call for conduit to be:
1. Installed for feeders.
2. Installed in hazardous areas.
3. Installed in concrete slabs at ground fioor.
99-42-019.0 8/18/99
16110 -1
I
I
I
m
I
I
4.
5.
Installed exposed below 6 fe_et.
Installed in wet locations.
2.04 RIGID STEEL CONDUIT (RSC)
A. Use rigid steel conduit where drawings call for conduit to be:
1. Installed underground
2. Exposed to severe mechanical damage.
2.05 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC/
A. Use PVC for:
1. · Underground service entrance conduits for power.
2. Underground service entrance conduits for telephone.
3. Exterior branch circuits installed underground.
2.06 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
A. Provide flexible metal conduit for termination at equipment subject to motion and
vibration.
B. Conduit shall be electrically continuous from outlet or conduit end to utilization
equipment.
C. Length shall not exceed 6 feet.
D. Maximum length concealed in walls shall be 3 feet.
E. Where exposed to continuous or intermittent moisture, conduit shall be liquid tight.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Minimum size of conduits shall be 1 /2".
B. Conduit joints shall be cut square, threaded, reamed smooth, and drawn up tight so
conduit ends will butt in couplings, connectors and fittings.
C. Make bends or offsets with standard ells or field bends with an approved bender.
D. Run concealed conduits in direct line with long sweep bends or offsets. Run exposed
conduits parallel to and at right angles to building lines. Group multiple conduit runs in
banks.
E. Conduit systems shall be made up electrically continuous.
F. Secure conduits to boxes and cabinets with double locknuts and bushings.
99-42-019.0 8/18/99
16110-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
G. Cap ends of conduits to prevent entrance of water and other foreign material during
construction. ·
H. Complete conduit systems before pulling conductors.
I. Support conduits as specified in 16190 and in accordance with National Electrical Code.
J. Provide cable supports in conduits rising vertically in accordance with the National
Electrical Code, Article 300.
K. Provide No. 12 AWG copper pLII wires or nylon cord in all empty conduits. Provide
insulated bushing on both ends of empty conduits.
L. Where IMC or RSC conduit is installed in a cabinet, junction box, pull box or auxiliary
gutter, conductors shall· be protected by insulated bushings. Locknuts shall be installed
on conduit outside and inside enclosure.
M. In concrete slabs block up conduit from forms and securely fasten in place. Conduits in
ground floor slabs shall have a minimum of 1-1/2" concrete coverage above and below.
Stuff boxes and cork fittings to prevent entrance of water.
N. Use expansion fittings or flexible conduit, properly bonded, to assure ground continuity
across expansion joints in floors and ceilings.
0. Terminate conduits for feeders and branch circuits directly into panelboard enclosure
without the use of pull boxes, junction boxes, wire ways, or auxiliary gutters, unless the
panelboard enclosure does not provide sufficient surface area for all conduits. Where
such cases exist, notify the Engineer. In no case shall splices in such boxes and wire
ways be permitted.
P. Failure to route conduit through building without interfering with other equipment and
construction shall not constitute a reason for an extra charge. Equipment, conduit, and
fixtures shall fit into available spaces in building and shall not be introduced into building
at such times and manner as to cause damage to structure. Equipment requiring
servicing shall be readily accessible.
Q. Conduits shall be mechanically and electrically continuous from outlet to outlet and from
outlets to cabinets, pull or junction boxes.
3.02 PVC
A. Provide 1 /4" nylon pull rope in all primary power and incoming telephone service
entrance conduits.
8. No PVC shall emerge from the ground or the concrete slab or encasement. PVC shall
convert to galvanized rigid metal prior to penetrating slab or exiting concrete
encasement.
99-42-019.0 8118199
16110-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C. Make bends with standard ells or with an approved bender. A blow torch shall not be used. ·
3.03 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
A. Conduits shall be 3/8" minimum size for lighting fixtures and 1/2" minimum size for utilization equipment other than lighting fixtures. ·
B. Fittings shall be made of either steel, or malleable iron only.
C. A copper ground wire shall be in~talled as a jumper around flexible conduit. The jumper may be installed inside of flexible conduit or outside of conduit to assure continuity of ground. •
D. Install liquid tight flexible conduit in such a manner as to prevent liquids from running on the surface toward fittings.
E. Allow sufficient slack conduit to reduce the effect of vibration.
END OF SECTION
99-42-019.0 8/18/99
16110-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
SECTION 16121
CONDUCTORS -600 VOLTS AND BELOW
A. Comply with the provisions of Sections 16010 and 16050.
B. Provide a complete system of conauctors for lighting, power, and systems throughout
the project.
1.02 RELATED WORK
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit data sheets for products furnished under this Section.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. American Insulated Wire
B. General Cable.
C. Okonite.
D. Pyrotenax (Mineral Insulated applications)
E. Rome.
F. Southwire.
2.02 CONDUCTORS
A. Provide 98% conductivity copper conductors with 600-volt insulation.
B. For conductors No. 12 AWG and No. 10 AWG, provide solid type THWN or THHN.
C. For conductors No. 14 AWG and smaller, provide stranded type THHN. Where stranded
conductors are used, maximum stranding shall be 7 for #16 and #18; 19 for #14.
D. For conductors No. 8 AWG and larger, provide stranded type THHN, or THWN applied
consistently with insulation ratings and NEC requirements.
E. Provide white or gray colored neutral conductors; provide color coded phase conductors.
99-42-019.0 6/16/99
16121 -1
=
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
F. Minimum conductor size shall be:
1. #12 for power wiring
2. #14 for hard wired controls unless otherwise specified
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
· A. Conductors shall be continuous from origin to panel or equipment termination without
splices. Where splices and taps are, necessary or required, they shall be made in splice
boxes. '
B. Install pull boxes in circuits or feeder;s over 100' long.
C. Make splices and connections only in outlet, pull or junction boxes.
D. Use powdered soapstone or pulling compound to pull conductors.
E. Deliver conductors to jobsite new and in original wrapping, package or reel.
F. Conductors and connections shall test free of grounds, shorts, and opens.
G. Provide No. 10 wire in lieu of No. 12 wire for any branch circuit in excess of 200 feet to
prevent excessive voltage drop.
H. Use Ideal wire nuts, Scotchlok Type Y, R, G, or B connectors for fixture connections at
outlet boxes.
I. Make feeder taps and joints with approved compression sleeves. Insulate sleeves with
heat shrink tubing, rated 600 V., 90 degrees C., containing factory applied sealant.
J. Leave a minimum of 8" slack wire in every outlet box whether it be in use or left for future
use.
K. Color code conductors as follows:
1. 120/208 Volt Systems:
a. Phase A-Black
b. Phase B-Red
C. Phase C-Blue
d. Neutral-White
e. Ground-Green
L. Use factory color coded conductors where commercially available. If not available, use
black conductors and band with color tape.
M. Install in each branch-circuit panelboard a legend explaining color code for ungrounded
conductors.
N. Complete conduit system, including bushings, before pulling wire and cable.
99-42-019.0 8118199
16121 -2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
0. Maintain separation of electric ligh( power, Class 1, 2 and 3 wiring throughout raceway systems. Comply with requirements of NFPA-70, paragraphs 300-3, 725-15 and 725-54.
END OF SECTION
99-42-019.0
16121 -3 8/18/99
I
I
I
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
SECTION 16130
OUTLET BOXES
A Comply with the provisions of Section 16010.
8. Provide each fixture, switch, receptacle, and other wiring device with a galvanized outlet
box of appropriate size and depth for its particular location and use.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A Sections 16110: Raceways and Conduit Systems.
8. Section 16190: Supporting Devices and Hangers.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A Submittal of products furnished under this Section is not required.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A National
8. Appleton.
C. Raco.
D. General Electric.
E. Steel City.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A Locate boxes to prevent moisture from entering or accumulating within them.
B. Support outlet boxes independently of conduit, as required by the National Electrical
Code.
C. Provide 4" octagonal x 1-1/2" ceiling outlet boxes. For increased cubic capacity, provide
4" octagonal x 2-1/8", 4" square x 1-1/2" or 4-11/16" square x 2-1/8" ceiling outlet boxes.
99-42-019.0 8/18/99
16130 -1
D
u
D
m
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D. Provide 4" square X 1-1 /2" deep boxes for switches, receptacles, data, and telephone
outlets in drywall partitions. Use square cut plaster rings installed within 1/4" of finished
wall.
E. Where required to hang a specified fixture, provide a fixture stud of the no-bolt, self-
locking type on ceiling outlets.
F. Provide 2-1/2" x 3-3/4" one gang masonry boxes for switches and receptacles installed
in concrete block walls not plastered. For increased cubic capacity, provide 3-1/2" x 3-
3/4" one gang masonry boxes. Where, more than two conduits enter the box from one
direction, provide 4" square boxes with' square cut device covers not less than 1" deep
specifically designed for this purpose .. Use round edge plaster rings only if the block
walls are to be plastered. Use sectionpl or gangable type outlet boxes only in drywall
construction.
G. Provide fittings with threaded hubs for screw connections and with the proper type
covers for switches and receptacles served by exposed conduit. Use pressed steel
outlets only for ceiling fixture outlets. Prnvide condulets with threaded hubs and covers
and with proper configurations for all changes of direction of exposed conduits. Standard
conduit ells may be used if they do not interfere, damage, or mar the appearance of the
installation.
H. Use boxes of sufficient cubic capacity to accommodate the number of conductors to be
installed. See Article 370 of the National Electric Code.
I. Effectively close unused openings in boxes with metal plugs or plates.
J. Set boxes so that front edges are flush with finished surfaces.
K. Secure boxes to surfaces upon which they are mounted or embed boxes in concrete
masonry. Support boxes from structural members with approved braces.
L. Install blank device plates on outlet boxes left for future use.
M. Provide bushings in holes through which cords or conductors pass.
N. Install boxes so that the covers will be accessible at all times.
0. Install outlet boxes on opposite sides of the same wall offset to avoid back to back
mounting where possible.
END OF SECTION
99-42-019.0 B/18/99
16130-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
' I
I
I
SECTION 16131
PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 . WORK INCLUDED
A. Comply with the provisions of Sections 1601 O and 16050.
B. Provide pull and junction boxes of appropriate size and depth as indicated on the
drawings and as specified hereinafter.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 16110: Raceways and Conduit Systems.
B. Section 16190: Supporting Devices and Hangers.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittal of products furnished under this Section is not required.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. For interior work, provide galvanized sheet metal boxes of code thickness with lapped
and welded joints, 3/4" flanges and screw covers.
B. For exterior work, provide galvanized sheet metal boxes of code thickness with lapped
and welded joints, 3/4" flanges, bolted covers with full gaskets forming a completely
raintight assembly, equal to Keystone 19000, and 37900 series.
C. For exterior work in graded areas outside the building, provide heavy duty sidewalk
junction boxes externally flanged for flush mounting. Covers shall be fully gasketed,
watertight and secured with plated screws or bolts equal to Quazite type PC.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide junction boxes as shown on drawings and otherwise where required, sized
according to number of conductors in box or type of service to be provided. Minimum
junction box size 4" square and 2-1/8" deep.
B. Provide screw covers for junction boxes.
C. Install boxes in conduit runs wherever necessary to avoid excessive runs or bends. Do
not exceed 100' runs without pull boxes.
99-42-019.0 8/18/99
16131 -1
I
u
I' ,,
I
I
I
·1
I ,.
I
I
I
D. Rigidly secure boxes to walls or· ceilings. Conduit runs will not be considered as
adequate support.
E. Install boxes with covers in accessible locations. Size boxes in accordance with Articles
370 and 373 of the National Electric Code.
F. Do not inst2II pull or junction boxes for joint use of line voltage and signal or low voltage .
controls unless all conductors are insulated for the highest voltage being used in the
same box.
G. Identify branch circuit j-boxes and pull boxes with designation of panelboard and circuit
number of circuits contained therein, with permanent marker.
H. Identify feeder j-boxes and pull boxes. with designation of panel board/switchboard
source as "FROM" and load served as "TO" with permanent !ables as described in
16050.
END OF SECTION
99-42-019.0 8118199
16131 -2
•
I
I
. ,
·•·
I
I
I
' I,
••
I
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
SECTION 16134
PANELBOARDS
A. Comply with the provisions of Section 16010 and 16050.
B. Provide circuit breaker type panelboards; as indicated on drawings and as specified
hereinafter.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data for review .
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Square "D".
B. G.E.
C. Cutler-Hammer/Westinghouse .
D. Siemens.
2.02 PANELBOARD TYPES
A. Circuit breaker type branch-circuit panelboards for 120/208 volts, 3-phase, 4-wire
service shall be Square "D" type NQOD with circuit breakers rated 10,000 AIC.
B. Circuit breaker type branch-circuit panelboards for 277/480 volts, 3-phase, 4-wire
service, shall be Square "D" type NEHB with circuit breakers rated 14,000 AIC.
C. Circuit breaker type distribution panelboards for 120/208 volt, 3-phase, 4-wire service
shall be Square "D" I-Line distribution type. Provide breakers in accordance with the
following:
1. 240volt, 100 amp frame -18,000 AIC
2. 240volt, 250 amp frame -25,000 AIC
3. 240 volt, 400 amp frame -42,000 AIC
4. 240 volt, 800 amp frame -42,000 AIC
D. Provide circuit breakers of the interrupting rating shown on the drawings where the
available fault current exceeds ratings shown above.
E. Fusible switch type distribution panelboards shall be Square D type QMB .
99-42-019.0 8/18/99
16134 -1
I
I
I
D
I
I ,,
I
. ,
I
I
I
I
I·
I.
I
I
F. Provide fuses for fusible switch type distribution panel boards as specified in 1601 O and
as shown on drawings. Provide R-ciips in switches where Class R fuses are used.
G. Bus bars shall be copper
2.03 REQUIRED FEATURES
A. Provide circuit breakers with lugs. (both main and branch circuit lugs) suitable anci UL
approved for both aluminum and copper conductors.
B .. · Provide electrically isolated factory installed_;neutral bus.
C. Provide separate ground bars complete. wilt. lugs or connectors on bar.
D. Provide panel doors equipped with chrome-plated locks and catches, all keyed alike.
Provide two keys for each lock. Provide fronts with adjustable indicating trim clamps.
E. Provide thermal magnetic circuit breakers which are fully rated and temperature rated for
a 40 degrees C ambient. Breakers shall be quick-make, quick-break type with trip
indication shown by handle position other than ON or OFF and with a common trip on all
multi-pole breakers .
F. Refer to drawings for numbers of branch circuits, their ratings, number of poles and
arrangements.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Ground separate ground bars to panel boxes and to the main service entrance ground
bus with a code-sized grounding conductor installed in the same conduit as the phase
and neutral conductors.
B. Install circuits using a common neutral in accordance with the National Electrical Code.
C. Provide six circuit breaker handle lock-on devices for each branch-circuit panelboard,
installed as directed byOwner's Representative, to prevent unauthorized personnel from
turning off circuits to controls, unit heaters, clocks, night lights. Turn spare lock-on
devices over to the Owner's Representative.
D. Provide typed directory cards under plastic on the doors of branch circuit panelboards.
Directories shall indicate devices being served including space numbers or space names
in which devices or fixtures are located. Space names and numbers shall match the
graphics installed.
END OF SECTION
99-42-019.0 8/18/99
16134-2
D
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
SECTION 16140
WIRING DEVICES
A. Comply with the provisions of Section 16010.
8. Provide switches, receptacles, and other wiring devices as indicated on drawings.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data for review. ·
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Arrow Hart
8. Eagle
C. Hubbell
D. Leviton
E. Pass and Seymour.
F. Leviton numbers are used unless otherwise noted, but products of equivalent quality by
named manufacturers will be acceptable.
2.02 SWITCHES
A. 15-Amp, 120/277 VAC:
1. Single pole: Leviton No. 1201-1.
2. Three-way: Leviton No. 1203-1.
3. Single pole, weatherproof: Leviton No. 1201 with Steel City No. SW1-C
weatherproof plate.
4. Single pole with pilot light (120 VAC): Leviton No. 1201-PL.
2.03 RECEPTACLES
A. 15-Amp, 125 VAC:
1. Duplex type:) Leviton No. 5252-1 for normal power devices.
2. Ground fault circuit interrupter: Leviton No. 6598HG-1.
3. Duplex safety type: Leviton No. 5262-SGI.
4. Weatherproof type and cover: Leviton No. 4970.
99-42-019.0 8/18/99
16140 -1
D
u
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
5. Duplex, isolated ground type for information system peripherals. Leviton No.
5262-IGW.
B. 20-Amp, 125 VAC Receptacles:
1. Leviton No. 5362-1.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Mounting:
1. Mount switches 46" above the finished floor to center line of switch unless noted
otherwise.
2. Mount receptacles 18" above the finished floor to center line of receptacle unless
noted otherwise.
B. Polarity: Wire receptacles so that the hot wire, neutral wire and ground wire connect to
the proper terminals.
C. Grounding: Install a No. 12 green ground wire from device grounding terminal back to
grounding bus in panel board, as noted on drawings.
D. Receptacles shall be installed with ground pin up.
E. In renovation and/or addition projects, if existing receptacles are not installed with
ground pin up, request a ruling from the Engineer.
F. For GFCI receptacles, do not utilize feed-thru feature, unless required by drawings.
G. A single receptacle installed on an individual branch circuit shall have an ampere rating
of not less than that of the branch circuit.
END OF SECTION
99-42-019.0 8/18/99
16140 -2
D
0
u
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
SECTION 16141
DEVICE PLATES
A. Comply with the provisions of Section 16010.
B. Provide device plates on switches, receptacles, telephone outlets and miscellaneous
devices.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 16140: Wiring Devices
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data for review.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Provide plates from wiring device manufacturer, equal to Leviton Series 84000 stainless
steel, .04" thick.
B. Provide cast alloy or stamped metal plates on exposed switches and receptacles.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install device plates in full contact with wall surface. Plates shall not project out from the
wall.
B. Install device plates in full contact with surface mounted box. Plates shall not project out
from the edge of the box.
C. Plates for safety type receptacles shall be installed with tamper resistant screws.
END OF SECTION
99-42-019.0 8/18/99
16141 -1
0
0
m
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 WORKINCLUDED
SECTION 16170
SAFETY SWITCHES
A. Compiy with the provisions of Sections 16010 and 16050.
B. Provide horsepower rated, quick-make, quick-break, safety switches with the number of
poles and .fuses as required. For 240 volt switches use general duty type. For 600 volt
switches, use heavy duty type. Provide Class R f~se in clips in each type.
C. Switches shall have arc shields, be of enclosed· construction and fusible or non-fusible
as indicated. Switches shall be rated for either 240-volt AC or 600-volt AC service as
required.
D. Switches shall be capable of interrupting locked rotor currents of motors which they
serve.
E. Switches shall have UL listed lugs suitable for 75deg.C copper or aluminum conductors.
F. Switches shall be pad lockable in the open (off) position.
G. Fusible switches shall have a UL listed short circuit rating of 100,000 amps rms with
fuses applied.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data for review.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Square D.
B. G.E.
C. Cutler-Hammer/Westinghouse.
D. Provide Square D Series HU-660, six-pole safety switches for part-winding or two-speed
motors requiring remote disconnects.
99-42-019.0 8/18/99
16170 -1
0
D
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide non-fusible switches at remote motor locations (rain-tight where required) as
indicated on drawings and as required by NEC.
B. Identify safety swiiches with bakelite nameplates in accordance with Section 16050.
C. Use NEMA 1 for interior use and NEMA-3R for ext~rior use.
t
D. Provide two normally open and two normally closed auxiliary contacts for disconnect
switches used to serve fan system motors including supply fans, return air fans, exhaust
. fans, make up air fans, and relief air fans for electrical interlock with mechanical control
circuits.
E. Switches used for service equipment shall be Heavy Duty type, UL listed for service
equipment use.
END OF SECTION
99-42-019.0 8118199
16170-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16190
SUPPORTING DEVICES AND HANGERS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Comply with the provisions of Sections 16010 and 16050.
B. Provide a system of supporting devices and hang~rs for support or bracing of conduit,
electrical equipment, including safety switches, fixtures, panelboards, outlet boxes,
junction boxes, and cabinets.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 16110: Raceways and Conduit Systems.
B. Section 16130: Outlet Boxes.
C. Section 16131: Pull and Junction Boxes.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals are not required.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Erice Products, Inc.
B. Steel City.
C. Minerallac.
D. Rayco Fastners.
2.02 TYPES OF SUPPORTING DEVICES
A. Provide appropriate supporting means as detailed on Drawings.
B. Unless otherwise directed in Specifications or Drawings provide appropriate supporting
devices and hangers for electrical equipment from this list of Caddy fasteners:
1. "Z" purlin clips -1-1 /4" maximum conduit.
2. Conduit clips -2" maximum conduit.
3. Beam clamps (rod hanger clamps and vertical flange clamps) for support of
threaded rods
4. Beam clamps (set screw type) -2" maximum conduit.
99-42-019.0 8/18/99
16190-1
D
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Beam clamps (universal) for support of boxes and combination conduit hanger
clamps.
Combination push-in conduit clips -1" maximum conduit.
Combination conduit hanger clamps -2" maximum conduit.
Flexible conduit clips -1" maximum flexible conduit.
Special combination conduit clips -1" maximum conduit.
One hole steel straps.
Conduit hangers -4" maximum conduit.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Secure conduits to within 3 feet of each outlet box, junction box, cabinet and fitting and
at intervals not to exceed ten feet in accordance with current edition of the National
Electrical Code.
B. Install clamps secured to structure for feeder and other conduits routed against the
structure. Use drop rods and hangers to support conduits run apart from the structure.
C. Provide and install suitable angle iron, channel iron or steel metal framing with
accessories to support or brace electrical equipment including safety switches, fixtures
and panelboards.
D. Paint all supporting metal not otherwise protected, with rust inhibiting primer and then
with a finish coat if appropriate to match the surrounding metal surfaces. (Prepainted or
galvanized support material is not required to be painted or repainted.)
E. Use of chains, perforated iron, baling wire, or tie wire for supporting conduit runs will not
be permitted.
F. Use of Caddy clips to support conduit to top of I-bar ceiling grid will not be permitted.
G. For support of low voltage wiring not required to be in conduit, Contractor shall bundle
cables together in a neat manner using approved nylon tie wraps. Bundled cables shall
be supported with "J" hooks on telephone type bridle rings, a minimum of six feet on
centers.
1. Use UL listed Ty-wraps for plenum use in plenum areas.
2. Maximum supported weight rating of "J" hooks shall not be exceeded.
3. Identify differing types of cables and tag them with tape indicating service, i.e
telephone, nurse call and dictation.
4. Identification tape shall be provided at minimum intervals of 25 feet on center
and within each individual space.
END OF SECTION
99-42-019.0 8/18/99
16190-2
D
u
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
SECTION 16450
GROUNDING
A. Comply with the provisions of Section 16010.
B. The entire system of raceways and equipment shan be grounded in accordance with
Article No. 250 and No. 517 of the National Electrical Code and any local regu!ation or
governing authority.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals are not required for products in this Section.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.01 REQUIREMENTS
A. Ground clamps: OZ Electrical Manufacturing Company Type "CG", or equal by Steel
City or Appleton.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. General
1. Clean all conductive surfaces on equipment to be grounded, to assure good
electrical continuity.
2. Effectively bond all grounding conductors to grounding electrodes, equipment
enclosures and ground busses.
3. Locate all grounding attachments away from areas subject to physical damage.
Provide protective covering as required.
4. All PVC conduit shall have separate ground wire installed in accordance with
Table 250-95 of the National Electrical Code.
B. Service EquipmenUBuilding Ground:
1. Service equipment shall be bonded to incoming main water line with heavy duty
ground clamp in accordance with Article No. 250-81 of National Electrical Code.
Bonding conductor shall be sized in accordance with Table 250-94 of National
Electrical Code and shall be insulated.
2. A grounding electrode conductor shall be run to a tri-pod grounding rod system
driven in ground outside foundation of building. System shall consist of three 3/4"
x 1 O' copperweld ground rods driven in ground in an equilateral triangular
configuration with a minimum of 25 ft. spacing between each. Size conductor
according to 250-94, NEC. Connection of each ground rod to one another shall
99-42-019.0 8/18/99
16450 -1
D
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.
4.
5.
be made using a conductor of same size. Conductors shall be insulated except in
earth, where they shall be bare.
Building steel shall be connected to ground bus on main service with a conductor
the same as specified above.
The system grounds shall be installed and connected as follows: Lay two 500
MCM bare copper conductors in the footing under one wall of the electrical
equipment room. The two conductors shall be continuous in the footing for a
minimum of 25 feet Connect the grounding conductors to ground bus in service
entrance section of main switchboard.
Grounding electrode conductors specified herein shall be installed without ' conduit, in general. Where exposed to potential physical damage, install the
conductor in Schedule 80 PVC.
C. Feeder/Branch Circuits:
1. Feeder circuits shall have a separate green grounding conductor in conduit sized
in accordance with Table 250-95 of the National Electrical Code:
a. Panelboards
2. Branch circuits shall have a separate green .grounding conductor installed in
same conduit as phase and neutral conductor from panel ground bus to device.
Install an equal number of grounding and neutral conductors. The grounding
conductor shall be sized in accordance with Table 250-95 of the National
Electrical Code.
3.
4.
3.02 TEST
Bond the receptacle ground pin to its box using a bonding jumper, except where
isolated ground receptacles are required.
Flexible conduit will not be approved as a grounding means. Flexible conduit
shall have a jumper wire sized to ampacity of branch breaker and connected to
conduit system on both ends. This applies to fixtures, motors, controls and other
devices.
A. Ground on main service shall be tested using test equipment similar to a "Biddle" tester.
Test data shall be submitted to Owner for approval and such approved test data shall
become a part of the Operating and Maintenance Instruction Manual. In no event shall
ground resistance exceed 25 OHMS. Additional rods or other means shall be employed
when measured resistance exceeds 10 OHMS.
END OF SECTION
99-42-019.0 B/18/99
16450 -2
0
D
u
I
I
I
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Motor starters ..
SECTION 16480
MOTOR STARTERS
B. Provide wiring in accordance with Section 16010.
1.02 RELATED WORK
I A. Section 16110: Raceways and Conduit Systems
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. Section 16121 : Conductors
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data for review.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.01 STARTERS
A. Design: NEMA standard, UL listed and CSA approved.
B. Ratings: NC symmmetrical ratings of 50,000 amps for 460 volt equipment and 35000
amps for equipment of lower voltages. Provide higher ratings where available fault
current exceeds these ratings and as called for on drawings.
C. Size: In accordance with NEMA standards.
D. Acceptable manufacturers: Allen Bradley, Square D, Cutler-Hammer/Westinghouse,
General Electric.
E. Starters shall include melting alloy overloads in each phase, and auxiliary interlocks as
required for proper system operation.
F. Provide starters mounted in NEMA 1 general purpose enclosures, unless location of
starter dictates other NEMA enclosure. For example, provide NEMA Type 3R enclosures
for outdoor use or NEMA Type 7 enclosures for hazardous areas.
G. Provide Hand-Off-Automatic selector switches in each starter.
H. Provide 120 volt control transformers in each starter, individually fused from the line side
of the starter using two cartridge fuses and one fuse in the secondary. Size transformers
to carry the holding coil circuit and other connected devices.
99-42-019.0 8/18/99
16480 -1
I
D
D
I
I
I
I. Provide lockable combination starters with motor circuit protectors sized in accordance
with the NEC Article 430.
J. Provide built-in power factor correction capacitors on motors 50 horsepower and larger
to correct the power factor to 95%. Connect capacitors between the contactor and
overload relays.
K. Pushbutton station, selector switches, ·and pilot lights:
1. Oiltight, manufacturer's standard unit.
2. Pushbutton station: Momentary contact type with green start button, red st::,p ' button, and legend plate. _
3. Selector switches: Standard knob maintained contact type with legend plate.
4. Pilot lights: 120 volt lamps with green glass color cap.
I PART 3 -EXECUTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.01 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install motor starters in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and
requirements of NEC.
B. Provide thermal overloads at system startup in accordance manufacturer's
recommendation for specific application.
C. Identify starters and controls as required by Section 16010.
END OF SECTION
99-42-019.0 8118199
16480 -2
II
I
D
u
D
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16603
TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 .WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide three phase transient voltage surge suppression (TVSS) devices at electrical
panels, NL 1, to protect equipment from transient voltage surges:
i
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. EFI Corporation.
B. Leviton
C. Innovative Technology.
D. Advanced Protection Technologies.
E. Furnish the EFI Catalog number listed for the following applications: (or equivalent by
other named manufacturers):
1. 120/208 volt three phase: MBP120EFI-Y3
2.02 MATERIALS
A. TVSS devices shall be capable of suppressing and withstanding all voltage and total
energy levels of:
1. IEEE-587 (ANSI 62.41) voltage transient and current surge wave shapes
including category A and B ringwaves and transient impulses.
2. UL-1449 Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors.
3. FCC Industrial Transient Standard.
B. TVSS devices shall conform to all national, state, and local electrical codes and be U.L.
listed.
C. TVSS devices shall conform to voltage service configurations without field modification.
D. TVSS devices shall be independently certified as to performance against IEEE-587,
ANSI 62.41, UL-1449 and FCC Industrial Transient Standards. Independent certification
shall also include EM 1/RFI noise attenuation data.
99-42-019.0 8/18/99
16603-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Mount all three phase TVSS devices adjacent to the panelboards served. Cabinets for
devices serving flush mounted panelboards shall be provided for flush mounting.
Cabinets shall comply with Section 16161 of the specification.
8. Ground the TVSS devices and cabinets in accordance with the manufacturers
instructions, the National Electrical Code and wiring diagrams shown on the drawings. I
C. Provide wiring to the remote monitor(s) when specified in accordance with the
manufacturers instruction and as shown on the drawings. Mount remote monitor(s) in the
location shown ·on the drawing.
D. Provide Owner with two spare .units for each type of 277/480 volt or 120/208 volt TVSS
employed.
E. Suppressors shall be close -nippled to the panel being protected; wire length shall be as
short as possible between point of connection to circuit breaker and suppressor.
~ .·
F. Provide a three-pole branch circuit breaker in each panel to be protected, for connection
of suppressor to panel bus.
END OF SECTION
99-42-019.0 8/18/99
16603 -2
I
a
n
D
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 1 -GENERAL
SECTION 16900
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
1. 01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This section includes all labor, materials, tools,
equipment, supervision, transportation,
engineering, and drawings necessary to furnish and
install controls and instrumentation required for
the FCX OU3 Remedial Action including flow,
pressure, and temperature indicators; blower
controls; compressor controls; alarms; etc. as
specified herein and as shown on the Drawings.
1. 02
B. It is the intent of these specifications to require
a complete and operable installation of the
instrumentation and control system. The Contractor
shall furnish and install all equipment including
any necessary incidentals, whether or not
specifically called for or indicated on drawings,
but necessary for a complete system.
C. The manufacturer shall provide
for installation, start-up,
outlined below.
technical assistance
and training as
D. Control system to be provided by a single supplier.
RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01300 -Submittals
B. Section 01340 -Submittal Schedule
C. Section 01600 -Material and Equipment
D. Section 01660 -Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
of Systems
E. Section 15060 -Piping Systems and Appurtenances
F. Section 15481 -Packaged Air Sparging System
G. Section 154 8 9 -Packaged
System
H. Division 16 -Electrical
Soil Vapor
I. Section 16901 -SCADA Operator Interface
Extraction
P: \PROJ\60313 .01 l \16900. DOC 16900-1
D
D
u
I
D
u
D
I
a
g
g
I
I
I
I
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Contractor shall submit detailed shop drawings
including system drawings, details, wiring
diagrams, opera ting data, detailed description
of operating sequence, and description and
engineering data on each control system
component in accordance with Section 01340.
2. Contractor shall submit to Owner three (3)
bound copies of Operation and Maintenance
instructions for all instruments and controls
specified in this section. Information shall
be sufficient to instruct personnel who are
unfamiliar with such equipment in operation and
maintenance of the equipment. Diagnostic
procedures shall be provided for use in the
event of equipment shutdown or malfunction.
B. Field Test Results:
1. Contractor shall submit a written report giving
results of the required field tests.
C. Manufacturer's Reports:
1. Certification that equipment provided is in
compliance with this specification including
results of factory tests, quality control
checklists, and inspection forms.
2. Contractor
results of
serviceman,
visit, tasks
D. Guarantee:
shall submit a written report of
each visit by a manufacturer's
including purpose and time of
performed, and results obtained.
1. Equipment Guarantee: In addition to
manufacturer's standard warranty, Contractor
shall include services of a factory-trained
serviceman to provide repair service for
equipment for period of one year commencing
with time the equipment is placed in continuous
permanent operation. This service shall
include cost of all replacement parts required
during period.
2. Warranty: Equipment shall also be warranted by
manufacturer for a one-year (minimum) period.
\ \BCNSH03 \PROJECTS\ PROJ\ 60313 , 011\16900. DOC 16900-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
m
g
E. Spare Parts:
1. Contractor shall submit a complete and detailed
list of spare and replacement parts including
original equipment manufacturer part numbers.
F. Miscellaneous:
1. Instrumentation symbols shall be consistent
with Instrument Society of America
Instrumentation Symbols and Identification.
2. Deviations from Drawings and Specifications, if
any.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Contractor shall warrant
will operate as specified
Function and Description.
that equipment provided
under the Instrumentation
B. In the event that warranty is breached, Owner shall
notify Contractor. As soon as practicable after
receiving notification, Contractor shall take all
necessary steps, at no cost to Owner to fulfill its
warranties thereunder including but not limited to,
repairing and/or replacing any of the equipment
causing the system not to perform properly.
1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver equipment and materials to Site to
uninterrupted progress of Work.
insure
B. Store equipment and materials to permit
for inspection and identification.
equipment in covered storage off ground
corrosion.
1.06 INSTRUMENTATION FUNCTION AND DESCRIPTION
A. General:
easy access
Store all
and prevent
Provide instrumentation and controls to perform
functions described hereafter and in individual
package system specification sections.
Instrumentation and control requirements are
discussed below in conjunction with the P & I
Diagram in Drawings. The PLC software tag names
are presented in italics.
B. Packaged Air Sparge System:
1. Air sparge system
packaged system as
shall be
described
\ \BCNSll03 \PROJECTS\ PROJ\ 603 13 , 0 11 \ 16900. DOC 16900-3
provided as a
in Specification
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section 15481. Packaged air sparge system will
supply sparge air to sparge wells SW-1 and SW-
2. Compressor will be activated/deactivated
using a three position (off/on/auto) hand
switch mounted locally. Compressor's indicator
lights will be located on the local IC panel.
Hand switch will allow the operator to manually
turn the compressor on and off or operate in
the automatic mode controlled by the PLC, the
moisture separator and the blower in the
corresponding soil vapor extraction system.
Compressor will be interlocked with extraction
blower so that compressor can not operate
unless extraction blower is also operating.
Operator shall be able to select compressor
operating mode (on/off/auto) and monitor
compressor status (off/on) from SCADA system
(MS0301). The SCADA system shall record
compressor process data and ~larm history.
2. Pressure element with indicator ( PE0301) will
be provided to monitor the discharge pressure
at compressor. Pressure control system will
consist of a pressure transmitter (PT) that
sends a signal to the PLC. The PLC shall be
programmed to have the following pressure set
points:
Set point low pressure. (LP) deactivates
compressor located in equipment room.
Set point high pressure (HP) also deactivates
compressor.
The two set points define operating range of
packaged air sparge system.
The PT output shall be displayed on SCADA
system in psi. The operator shall be able to
monitor the pressure readings, monitor set
points, and change set points through the SCADA
system.
3. Influent air line to each sparg~ well will have
a solenoid valve for pulsing air flow to the
two sparge wells. Each solenoid valve will be
controlled by the PLC (TM0401 and TM0402).
Pulsing air flow to each well independently
will be an adj us table timed function of PLC.
Operator shall be able to monitor valve status
(open/closed) and set pulse cycle as well as
monitor and change set points from SCADA
system. The PLC shall be programmed to
automatically close the valves whenever the
soil vapor extraction blower is not operating.
\ \BCNSHOJ \PROJECTS\ PROJ\ 60313.011 \ 16900. DOC 16900-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
4. Influent air line to each sparge well (SW-1 and
SW-2) will have a pressure element for
monitoring sparging pressure. Each pressure
element (PE0401 and PE0402) will have a local
pressure indicator (PI) display and will send a
signal to the PLC. Operator shall be able to
monitor sparge well pressure readings from
SCADA system.
5. Temperature element (TE0401 and TE0402) will be
provided on influent air line to each sparge
well (SW-1 and SW-2) for monitoring sparge air
temperature. The TE will transmit a signal to
a locally mounted temperature transmitter (TT).
This TT will transmit signals to PLC to display
instantaneous temperature via SCADA system.
6. Flow element (FE0401 and FE0402) will be
provided on influent air line to each sparge
well (SW-1 and SW-2) for monitoring actual flow
rate in cfm. The FE will transmit signal to a
locally mounted flow transmitter (FT). This FT
will transmit signals to the PLC to display
instantaneous flow rate and daily cumulative
flow via the SCADA system. PLC shall calculate
standard flow in scfm (FI8401 and FI8402) using
actual flow, temperature, and pressure inputs
(FE0401, TE0401, PE0401, and FE0402, TE0402,
PE0402 respectively).
C. Packaged Soil Vapor Extraction System:
1. Soil vapor extraction system shall be supplied
as a packaged system as described in Section
15489. Packaged soil vapor extraction system
will extract air and vapors from 10 extraction
wells (EW-1 through EW-10). Blower will be
activated/ deactivated using a three position
(off/on/auto) hand switch mounted locally.
Blower's indicator lights will be located on
local IC panel. Hand switch will allow
operator to manually turn blower on and off or
operate in the automatic mode controlled by
PLC, moisture separator level, and exhaust flow
rate. Operator shall be able to select blower
operating mode (on/off/auto) and monitor blower
status (off/on) from SCADA system (MS0201 and
MS0202) . SCADA system shall record blower
process data and alarm history.
2. Pressure element ( PE0203) will be provided to
monitor the suction side vacuum at blower.
Pressure control system will consist of a
pressure transmitter (PT) that sends a signal
\ \BCNSH03\P!lOJECTS\PROJ\60J l3. 011 \16900. DOC 16 9 0 0-5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
to PLC. PLC shall be programmed to have the
following pressure set points:
• Set point low pressure (LP) deactivates
blower, and activates an alarm (ALPE0203)
located on local IC Panel, SCADA system, and
autodialer notifying operator that blower is
not running properly. Reactivation of blower
will require an operator command through
SCADA system.
• Set point high pressure (HP) deactivates
blower, and activates an alarm (ALPE0203)
located on local IC Panel, SCADA system, and
autodialer notifying operator that blower is
not running properly. Reactivation of blower
will require an operator command through
SCADA system.
The PT output shall be displayed on the SCADA
system in inches of water column (in.W.C.)
vacuum. Operator shall be able to monitor
pressure readings, monitor set points, and
change set points through SCADA system.
Air compressor and electrically actuated valves
at SW-1 and SW-2 will be interlocked with
blower so that if blower is not running, air
compressor will not run and the valves will be
automatically closed.
3. Flow element (FE0202) will be provided on air
bleed-in line before blower. The FE will
transmit signal to a locally mounted FI/FT.
This FI will display flow rate in cfm through
this portion of system and will transmit
signals to PLC to display and record flow via
SCADA system.
4. Pressure element ( PE0201) will be provided on
common suction header before moisture
separator. PE will transmit signal to a locally
mounted PI/PT. This PI will display pressure
in in. W. C. through this portion of system and
will transmit signals to PLC to display and
record pressure via SCADA system.
5. Temperature element ( TE0201) will be provided
on common suction header before moisture
separator. TE will transmit signal to a
locally mounted TT. TT will transmit signals to
PLC to display and record temperature via SCADA
system.
\ \BCNSHOJ \ PROJECTS\PROJ\ 60313. 0 11 \ 16900. DOC 16900-6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D
D
D
D
I
I
6. Flow element (FE0201) will be provided on
common suction header before moisture
separator. FE will transmit signal to a locally
mounted FI/FT. This FI will display flow rate
in cfm through this portion of system and will
transmit signals to PLC to display and record
flow via SCADA system. PLC shall calculate and
display standard flow in scfm (FI8201) using
actual flow, temperature, and pressure inputs
(FE0201, TE0201, and PE0201).
7. Level control system (LE0201) will be provided
to control condensate level in moisture
separator. Level control system will consists
of level transmitter (LT) and indicator (LI).
LI output will be displayed locally and on
SCADA system. Level control system will have
the following set points:
• Set point high water level (HWL) activates an
alarm (ALLE0201) located on the local IC
Panel, SCADA system, and autodialer notifying
operator that moisture separator needs to be
drained.
• Set point high high water level (HHWL)
activates an alarm (ALLE0201) located on
local IC Panel, SCADA system, and autodialer
and deactivates air sparge and soil vapor
extraction systems. Once water level in
moisture separator falls below HHWL deadband,
reactivation of air sparge and soil vapor
extraction systems will require an operator
command through SCADA system.
8. Differential pressure indicator (PI) will be
provided on particulate filter before blower to
indicate pressure drop across filter (PE0202).
PI will display pressure differential in
in.W.C. and will transmit signals to PLC to
display and record pressure differential via
SCADA system. A high pressure differential
activates an alarm located on SCADA system and
autodialer notifying operator of high pressure
differential. Operator shall be able to change
alarm set point through SCADA system.
9. Temperature element ( TE0203) will be provided
on suction line after suction header and bleed-
in .line join. TE will transmit signal to a
locally mounted TT. This TT will transmit
signals to PLC to display and record
temperature via SCADA system.
\ \BCNSH03\ PROJECTS\PROJ\ 60313, 011 \ 16900 . DOC 16900-7
I
I
I
I
g
D
0
D
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
10. Flow element (FE0203) will be provided on
suction line after suction header and bleed-in
line join. FE will transmit signal to a locally
mounted FI/FT. This FI will display flow rate
in cfm through this portion of system and will
transmit signals to PLC to display and record
flow rate via SCADA system. PLC shall
calculate and display' standard flow in scfm
(FI8203) using actual flow, temperature, and
pressure inputs (FE0203, TE0203, and PE0203).
11. Electric current elements ( IE0201 and IE0202)
will be provided on motors for soil vapor
extraction blowers. IE will transmit signal to
a locally mounted IT. IT will transmit signals
to PLC to display amperage. An out-of-range
current activates an alarm on SCADA system and
autodialer, and deactivates blower.
12. Temperature element ( TE0204) will be provided
on discharge header from blower. TE will
transmit signal to a locally mounted TT. This
TT will transmit signals to PLC to display and
record temperature via SCADA system.
13. Pressure element (PE0204) will be provided on
discharge header from blower. PE will transmit
signal to a locally mounted PI/PT. This PI
will display pressure in in. W. C. through this
portion of system and will transmit signals to
PLC to display and record pressure via SCADA
system.
14. Two direct reading differential pressure
elements ( PE0205 and PE0206) will be provided
on granular activated carbon (GAC) columns
after blower to monitor pressure drop across
15.
columns. Pis will display pressure
differential in in.W.C. Pis will transmit
signals to PLC to display and record pressure
via SCADA system. Operator shall be able to
monitor and set differential set points through
SCADA system. An out-of-range pressure
differential activates an alarm (ALPE0205 and
ALPE0206) located on local IC Panel, SCADA
system, and autodialer notifying operator.
Temperature element ( TE0205) will be provided
between GAC columns. TE will transmit signal
to a locally mounted TT. TT will transmit
signals to PLC to display and record
temperature via SCADA system.
16. Temperature element (TE0207) will be
on effluent header from GAC columns.
provided
TE will
\ \BCNS!l03 \PROJECTS\ PROJ\ 60313.011 \ 16900 , DOC 16900-8
I
I
I
I
u
D
R
u
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
transmit signal to a locally mounted TT. TT
will transmit signals to PLC to display and
record temperature via SCADA system.
17. Pressure element (PE0207) will be provided on
effluent header from GAC columns. PE will
transmit a signal to a locally mounted PI/PT.
PI/PT will display pressure in in.W.C. through
this portion of system and will transmit
signals to PLC to display and record pressure
via SCADA system.
18. Flow element (FE0207) will be provided on
effluent header from GAC columns. FE will
transmit signal to a locally mounted FI/FT.
FI/FT will display flow rate in cfm through
this portion of system and will transmit
signals to PLC to display and record flow rate
via SCADA system. PLC shall calculate and
display standard flow in scfm (FI8207) using
actual flow, temperature, and pressure inputs
(FE0207, TE0207, and PE0207). An out-of-range
flow activates an alarm on SCADA system and
autodialer and deactivates blower.
19. Temperature element (TE0901) will be provided
in area of packaged air sparge and soil vapor
extraction systems. TE will be used to monitor
ambient air temperature in equipment area. TE
will transmit signal to a locally mounted TT.
TT will transmit signals to PLC to display and
record temperature via SCADA system.
20. Pressure element (PE0901) will be provided in
area of packaged air sparge and soil vapor
extraction systems. PE will be used to monitor
ambient barometric pressure in equipment area.
PE will transmit signal to a locally mounted
PT. This PT will transmit signals to PLC to be
used in standard flow rate calculations.
21. Extraction header from each extraction well
(EW-1 through EW-10) will have pressure element
for monitoring extraction well vacuum. Each
pressure element (PEOlOl through PEOllO) will
have local pressure indicator (PI) display and
will send signal to the PLC. Operator shall be
able to monitor extraction well vacuum readings
from SCADA system.
22. Temperature element ( TEOlOl through TEOllO)
will be provided on extraction header from each
extraction well (EW-1 through EW-10) for
monitoring temperature. TEs will transmit
signal to a locally mounted temperature
\ \BCNSH03\PROJECTS \PROJ\ 603 l 3 . 011 \ 16900. DOC 16900-9
I
I
I
I
I
I
0
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
23.
transmitter (TT).
PLC to display and
system.
TT will transmit signals to
record temperature via SCADA
Flow element (FE0101 through FEOllO) will be
provided on extraction header from each
extraction well (EW-1 through EW-10) for
monitoring soil vapor extraction system
performance. FEs will transmit signal to a
locally mounted flow transmitter (FT). FT will
transmit signa,ls to PLC to display and record
flow rate via SCADA system. PLC shall
calculate standard flow in scfm (FIBlOl through
FIBllO) using actual flow, temperature, and
pressure inputs (FE0101, TE0101, and PEOlOl
through FEOllO, TEOllO, and PEOllO
respectively).
D. Granular Activated Carbon Packaged System:
1.
2 .
GAC adsorber system shall be provided as
packaged system as described in Section 11500.
Two GAC vessels will be provided as part of
packaged system and will be configured to
operate in series. GAC system shall be
provided with the necessary equipment to
monitor pressure drop across each GAC column.
The package system shall operate with the SCADA
system as follows:
• Send signal to SCADA system that
the pressure differential across
vessel (PE0205 and PE0206).
indicates
each GAC
• Alarm signal (ALPE0205 and ALPE0206) shall be
sent to SCADA system,· local IC panel, and
autodialer that alerts operator of high
pressure differential across either GAC
vessel, indicative that carbon maintenance is
required.
E. Gas Analyzer:
1. Gas analyzers (AE0201 and AE0202) will be
provided as shown on Drawings. Analyzers will
transmit signals to PLC to display and record
PCE concentration via SCADA system.
1.07 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER
A. Provide PLC,
necessary)
hereafter.
italics.
SCADA system, and instrumentation (as
to perform functions described
PLC software tag names are presented in
\ \BCNSHO 3 \ PROJECTS\PROJ\ 60313.011 \ l 6900, DOC 16900-10
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
u
B
D
0
0
0
D
I
B. Alarm Priority:
System alarms will be categorized within PLC based
on priority level (1-high and 2-low).
levels for each alarm are given below.
alarms and their priority level shall be
programmable.
Priority
List of
readily
Priority
Alarm Taq Name Alarm Descriotion Level
ALAE0202 GAC-1 hiqh voe concentration 1
ALLE0201 Moisture separator HHWL 1
ALPE0205, GAC high pressure differential 1
ALPE0206
ALLE0201 Moisture separator HWL 2
ALPE0202 Particulate filter high pressure 2
differential
ALIE0201, Current meter out of range 2
ALIE0202
ALPE0203 Blower LP and HP 2
ALTE0204 Blower discharge high 2
temperature
ATPE0301 Compressor LP and HP
C. Data Collection:
1. PLC shall periodically sample and store data
items for maintaining records of historical
system performance. Data i terns to be sampled
and their frequency shall be easily
programmable. System shall be capable of
archiving all process data at sampling
frequency which can be user defined. Sampling
frequency of 1 minute shall be used for initial
programming of PLC data collection.
2. Operator shall be able to input
analytical data into PLC database.
type of analytical parameters will
by Owner at time of programming.
D. Reports:
laboratory
Number and
be specified
1. PLC shall be capable of generating and printing
data summary reports. Content and format of
reports shall be easily programmable. A flow
monitoring report shall be generated on demand
that includes the following information:
• Cumulative effluent flow volume (standard
cubic feet) on daily, a weekly, monthly and
yearly (to date) basis.
\ \BCNSHO 3\ PROJECTS\PROJ\ 60313. 0 L l \ 16900. DOC 16900-11
I
I
I
I
I
I
a
g
u
D
D
D
0
0
• Average effluent flow rate
feet per day) on a daily,
and yearly (to date) basis.
• Instantaneous effluent flow
cubic feet per minute) at
intervals each day.
(standard cubic
weekly, monthly,
rate (standard
specified time
2. Other reports shall be generated as specified
by the Owner during PLC programming.
3. PLC shall continuously generate an alarm report
that identifies the alarm, its time of
activation, and time it was acknowledged.
E. System Start-Up/Shutdown:
1. Automated system start-up and shutdown sequence
shall be programmed into PLC. Sequences will
be specified by Owner during PLC programming.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Dwyer Instruments, Inc., Michigan City, IN.
B. Rosemount, Inc., Chanhassen, MN
C. Approved Equal
2. 02 MATERIALS
A. General:
1. Equipment, or portions thereof, that are
exposed to influent vapors from SVE wells shall
be constructed of materials that will not
deteriorate as a result of the following
conditions.
\ \BCNSHO 3 \ PROJECTS \PI\OJ\ 603 l J. 0 l l \ 16 900. DOC 16900-12
I
I
I
I
I
m
I
I
I
I
D
0
D
ft
u
D
D
n
Process Parameter Projected Value
voe Concentration [ppm(v/v)]
cis-1,2-Dichloroethene
Tetrachloroethene
Trichloroethene
15
40
13
Relative humidity (%RH)
Temperature (°F)
50 to 100
60 to 230
2. Equipment not exposed to influent vapors shall
be constructed to function under the following
ambient conditions:
• Indoor area with no heating or cooling.
• Ambient temperature operating range of at
least 20°F to 120°F.
• Relative humidity of 40 to 95 percent.
B. Flow Sensors:
1.
2 .
3.
4.
5 .
6.
Contractor shall furnish and install pitot tube
flow sensors suitable to measure flow from 1 to
50 cfm in 2-inch SVE well piping and from 10 to
500 cfm in 6-inch header piping. Flow
measuring sensors shall be located in
accordance with Drawings.
Flow sensor shall have multiple sensing points
and built-in flow averaging capability.
Sensor shall be capable of insertion in
pipeline through a compression fitting.
Sensor body shall be constructed of stainless
steel.
Sensor shall be compatible with a differential
pressure transmitter.
Dwyer DS-300 Series or approved equal.
C. Pressure Transmitter:
1. Contractor shall furnish and install pressure
transmitters as shown on Drawings, specified
herein (Instrument Function and Description),
and in related Sections.
\ \BCNSH03\ PROJECTS\ PROJ\ 60313 , 01 l \ 16900. DOC 16900-13
n
I
g
B
D
D
D
D
B
I
I
I
I
2. Transmitter shall have a dial gage display.
3. Transmitter shall have a
supply.
13-35 VDC power
4. Transmitter shall have 4 to 20 mA loop output
compatible with PLC systems.
5. Transmitter
enclosure.
shall be housed in NEMA 4X
6. Process connection shall be in accordance with
manufacturer's specifications.
7. Transmitter shall be mounted in accordance with
manufacturer's specifications.
8. Pressure sensor range shall be Oto 100 in.W.C.
9. Dwyer, Model 604D or approved equal.
D. Temperature Transmitter:
1. Contractor shall furnish and install
thermocouples and temperature transmitters as
shown on Drawings, specified herein (Instrument
Function and Description), and in related
Sections.
2. Transmitter shall have a
supply.
12-35 VDC power
3. Transmitter shall have a 4 to 20 mA loop output
compatible with PLC systems.
4. Transmitter shall be housed in a NEMA 4
enclosure.
5. Process connection
fitting type.
shall be a compression
6. Transmitter shall be mounted in accordance with
manufacturer's specifications.
7. Dwyer, Series 650 or approved equal.
E. Moisture Separator Mechanical Level Switch System:
1. Contractor shall furnish and install one (1)
multi-stage displacer operated level switch to
be mounted -in moisture separator as shown on
Drawings and described herein.
\ \BCNSHOJ \PROJECTS \PROJ\ 60313. 011 \ 16900. DOC 16900-14
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
u
0
D
D
D
u
2 .
3.
4 .
5.
Switches shall have a 2-1/2 inch
type mount for installation as
Drawings.
NPT nipple
shown on
All materials of construction shall be
compatible with materials found in process
solution. Materials shall comply with all
applicable ASTM standards.
Displacers shall be fabricated from porcelain
and cable made from 316 stainless steel.
Switch mechanisms shall be constructed of 316
stainless steel.
6. All flanges and fittings shall· meet or exceed
applicable ANSI requirements.
7. Level switch shall carry a 5-year warranty for
defective material or workmanship provided
switch is installed in accordance with
manufacturer's instruction and operation
guidelines.
8. Contractor shall provide all mounting hardware
necessary for a complete installation.
9. Level switch system shall be compatible with
PLC control functions as described herein.
10. SOR, Model 700-series or approved equal.
F. Gas Analyzer:
1.
2 .
3.
Contractor shall furnish
phase voe analyzers with
on Drawings and specified
and install two gas
transmitters as shown
herein.
Detection range shall
tetrachloroethylene ( PCE) at
0-50 ppm PCE at AE0202 with
0.1 ppm.
be 0-200
AE0201
resolution
sample
AE0201
Gas analyzer shall be capable of
from 80 in.W.C. vacuum source at
20 in.W.C. pressure source at AE0202.
ppm
and
of
draw
and
4. Gas analyzer assembly shall have 115 VAC power
supply.
5. Gas analyzer shall be equipped with
having linear 4-20 mA loop output
with PLC systems.
\ \BCNSHO 3 \PROJECTS\ PROJ\ 60313.011 \ 16900, DOC 16900-15
transmitter
compatible
I
I
g
D
D
I
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
6. Transmitter shall be housed in a NEMA 4X
enclosure.
7. Gas analyzer shall have an
temperature range of -13 to 122°F.
operating
8. Gas analyzer shall be installed and calibrated
in accordance with the manufacturer's
specifications.
9. Mil-Ram Technology, Inc., Tox-Array 01-2300P
Pyrolyzer Transmitter; or approved equal.
G. Alarms:
1. Alarms shall receive a signal from level
controls, pressure indicators, etc. and shall
activate lights• on local IC panel. Provide a
4-20 mA signal to close valve, turn on/off
blower/ compressor, etc. as shown on Drawings,
specified herein (Instrument Function and
Description), and in related Sections.
H. Pressure gauges/indicators and control valves shown
on the drawings and described herein shall meet the
requirements of Section 15060.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall be as shown on Drawings,
specified herein, and in strict accordance with
manufacturer's instructions and recommendations
B. Contractor shall provide all materials and labor
for electrical wiring and incidentals that may be
necessary to complete installation of equipment
specified in this section.
C. Contractor shall not install instrumentation wiring
and electrical wiring in same conduit without
previous approval by Design Engineer.
3.02 START UP AND TESTING
A. Testing of system shall be performed by Owner or
Engineer. Manufacturer shall be available to
provide technical assistance concurrent with and as
part of services described above.
[END OF SECTION]
\ \BCNSH03 \ PROJECTS\PROJ\ 603 13. 0 11\16900. 0OC 16900-16
I
I
I
I
D
D
I
u
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16901
SCADA OPERATOR INTERFACE
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDES
A. Single system
services and
specifically
specification
supplier (Supplier)
equipment defined in
noted on contract
sections.
shall provide all
this section and as
drawings and other
B. Work described in this section shall include furnishing
all labor, materials, equipment, tools, and incidentals
required for a complete and operable installation of PLC
and SCADA system.
C. In general, work shall include furnishing and installing
instrumentation, control panels, personal computers
(PCs), computer network hardware/software, SCADA
software, database software, PLC hardware/software,
conduit, wire, fiber optics, telephone lines, and
accessories required to install a complete and
functional system, unless specifically noted otherwise.
The PLC/SCADA system shall be supplied complete in all
respects and shall be supplied (at a minimum) with
following major·components, and all associated hardware,
features, and appurtenances:
1. Expandable PLC housed in custom fabricated NEMA 4
panel. Panel will also contain · all hand switches
and alarm lights called for in Section 16900.
2. One (1) laptop PC with software to interface with
the SCADA system either remotely or via an RS 232
port at the Site.
3. Alarm printer.
C. Where control panels, control stations, I/0 and
interface boards, etc. are furnished with equipment
and/or by others, it shall be the responsibility of the
Supplier to furnish all hardware and equipment necessary
to insure proper interfacing and/or interconnection
between this equipment and PLC/SCADA system.
D. It is intent of these Specifications to require a
complete and operable installation of the
instrumentation and control system. The CONTRACTOR
shall furnish and install all equipment including any
necessary incidentals, whether or not specifically
\ \BCNSH03 \PROJECTS\ PROJ\ 6031J.011\16901 . doc 16901-1
I
I
I
a
u
d
D
8
b
D
I
I
I
1.02
called for or indicated on the drawings, but necessary
for a complete system.
E. Comply with all provisions of Division 16.
conductors, raceways, and wiring methods.
Including
F. Provide thorough documentation and training as specified
herein.
SUBMITTALS
A. Instrumentation and control equipment provided by the
Supplier shall be coordinated for proper operation with
related equipment and materials furnished by suppliers
and manufacturers of equipment specified in other
sections and on drawings. Including, but not limited
to, the following:
Packaged GAC System
Packaged Air Sparging System
Packaged Soil Vapor Extraction System
Instrumentation and Control
1. 03 SUBMITTALS
A. General
Section 11500
Section 15481
Section 15489
Section 16900
1. Shop drawings shall provide a true and complete
record of equipment as manufactured, delivered, and
installed. Shop drawings shall demonstrate that the
equipment furnished complies with provisions
required by this contract. Submittals will be
rejected if submittal does not identify location and
name of each piece of equipment. For example, if
pressure gauge is being used at three different
locations, submittal should identify all three
locations and associated instrument tag names. All
drawings shall be a maximum size of 11" x 17" for
inclusion within the binder.
2. Legends and Abbreviation Lists: As part of the
first Design Related Submittals for each subsystem,
submit a complete definition of symbols and
abbreviations used on this project. For example,
engineering units, flow nameplates, legends, data
sheets, point descriptions, CRT displays,
alarm/status logs and reports. Submit updated
versions with final version with the O&M Manuals.
3. Cross Referencing of Components: The Table of
Contents of the Submittal and O&M Manual shall
provide for each i tern: Component Data Sheet No.,
Specification Section Reference No., Model No.,
Description, Instrument I. D., Tag No. and
\ \BCNSHOJ \PROJECTS\PROJ\ 60313.011\16901 . doc 16901-2
D
fl
D
fl
D
R
0
u,
a
I
m
m
I
I
m
I
I
I
I'
I
D
I
D
n
·I
H
,u
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Calibration Range (for field devices). Furthermore,
each item's individual Component Data shall
reference the Specification Section Reference No.,
the Supplier's Drawing No. that has the Bill of
Material, Instrument I .D., Tag No. and Calibration
Range (for field devices). This information will be
in addition to other requirements specified.
4. Notification of Minor Deviations from Specification:
Any deviation from specifications shall be noted at
the front of the submittal in a separate section
labeled Items of Interest, Comments, and Requests
for Clarification. This section shall detail any
minor deviations from specifications herein. Each
Item of Interest, Comment, or Request for
Clarification shall be numbered and the
specification section in question shall be
referenced. These i terns shall be sorted by
Specification Section in ascending order. The
intent of this section is to make the Engineer aware
of any minor change from specification because of
outdated equipment, differences in panel
manufacturing from supplier to supplier, etc.
Approval of such minor deviations will be at the
sole discretion of the Engineer. No change in
contract price will be slowed if the minor
deviations are acceptable.
B. Design Plan
1. System Architectural Drawing ( s) . Provide
showing system hardware architecture.
drawing(s) shall include:
a. All PLCs
b. All computers
drawing(s)
These
c. All network equipment
bridges, converters, etc.
(patch panels, hubs,
d. All network peripherals (printers, modems, etc.)
e. All PLC and computer interface hardware
f. Identification and quantity of all network mediums
(i.e., number of fibers, twisted pairs, etc.)
g. All wiring devices (wall jacks, etc.)
2. System Hardware Descriptions. Provide descriptions
of hardware shown on System Architectural
Drawing(s). These descriptions or shop drawings
shall contain hardware description, proposed
\ \BCNSH0J \PROJECTS\PROJ\ 60313. 011\16901 . doc 16901-3
I
I
·I
I
I
I
I
·1
I
I
I
manufacturers, catalog number,
electrical characteristics.
and pertinent
3. System Software and Functional Overview
Descriptions. An overview description of how the
system will operate. Define all software products
and describe what the software does. This
description shall contain the manufacturer's name,
and detailed description of how the software will be
used for this project. This description shall be
customized to this project. This section should
include:
a. How historical data will be logged.
b. How historical data will be stored.
c. How historical data will be logged if server goes
down.
d. How historical data will be stored if server goes
down.
e. How SCADA database works.
f. How reports are generated.
g. How logs are generated.
h. How alarming is done.
i. How alarm pagers will work.
j . How modem access will work.
k. How computer security is handled.
1. How network management is handled.
m. Which system features you can access via modem.
n. How communication between network devices takes
place.
o. A general description of how the MMI software
works.
p. A description of how the PLC is programmed.
q. A description of how operator screens are created.
r. A general description of how the MMI, ladder
logic, and database work together.
\\BCNSHOJ\PROJECTS\PROJ\60313.011\16901.doc 16901-4
I
I
I
I
I ,,
s. A description of how historical data can be viewed
and trended.
t. A description of how to create trends.
The intent of these descriptions will be to provide
the Owner with an overview of his new system. Limit
the length of each description to two pages.
5. The Design Plan may be written in a manner which
would lend itself to being used for other
documentation and training requirements required by
this specification.
C. Provide Loop Drawings for all field wiring. Including
communication cables and fiber optics. Loop drawings
shall contain the following:
1. A separate line for each conductor/wire.
2. Labels for each conductor/wire.
3. A separate circle for each terminal point.
4. Labels for each terminal point.
5. Description of each terminal point (i.e., GND, +, -)
6. Conductor/Wire color.
7. Identify location of each terminal point.
Terminal Strip "K" in Control Panel CP2080)
8. Identify signal
terminates.
conductor shield and
9. Identify software and hardware addresses.
(i.e.'
where it
1 O. Identify signal conductor type.
catalog number).
(manufacturer and
11 . Show exact
from field
terminations
All internal
uniquely.
rerouting of all conductors and shields
device to PLC. Show and label all
and equipment associated with the loop.
panel jump er wires shall be labeled
D. Provide drawings of control panels, consoles, and/or
enclosures. These drawings shall include:
1. Wiring diagrams showing all power connections to
equipment within and on panels.
2. Fuse and breaker sizes.
\ \BCNSHOJ \PROJE:CTS\PROJ\ 60313.011 \ 1690 l . doc 16901-5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3. Grounding scheme.
4. Wiring of relays, analog line surge protectors, etc.
5. Show all wiring
designations.
numbers and
6. Cabinets shall be drawn to scale.
7. List material, fabrication
specifications.
terminal block
and painting
8. Show elevation of panel
location of door handles,
enclosure mounted items.
front cover. Including,
windows, lifting lugs, and
9. Show elevation of internal components of panel with
doors open.
10. All elevations shall be to scale.
11. All equipment and instrumentation in
named and labeled so that they
referenced to loop drawings
documentation. ·
panels shall be
can be cross-
and associated
E. Description and product data sheets of all hardware to
be installed. This list should describe each item and
where it is to be used in the system. Control hardware
would include all:
1. Instrumentation
2. Transmitters
3. PLC processor and I/0 cards
4. PC network interface cards
5. Surge protection devices
6.Motor drives
7. Starters and Disconnects
8. Overcurrent protective devices
9. Etc.
F. Provide ISA equipment specifications sheet for each
instrument. These sheets shall document how the
equipment operates, its intended function, its physical
environment and performance characteristics, and any
additional information needed to fully describe the
operation of the device. Provide an index which
identifies each data sheet and cross references the data
sheet to tag names, loop drawings, and equipment
locations in the paint. ·
H. Detailed description of
Including all:
\ \BCNSHOJ \PROJECTS\PRO,l\ 60313.011\16901. doc 16901-6
all customized software.
I
I
1: ,,
II ,,
I ,,
I
I
I ,,
I,
I
I
I
I
1. Graphic display screens
2. Logs
3. Reports
4. Historical data
5. Alarm schemes
6. Database programming and setup
7. PLC ladder logic programming
8. PLC memory map strategies
9. System diagnostics
10. Maintenance assistance routines
PLC ladder logic and MMI/SCADA configurations shall be
developed by the Supplier in conjunction with the Owner
and Engineer. A general description of how the system
is to work is presented in the specifications and on
contract drawings; however, the specifics of exact
control and operation of the syste~ shall be developed
by the Supplier and submitted in written form for
Engineer review.
MMI graphic screens shall be submitted for approval by
Owner and Engineer. Supplier should submit a
description of symbol and color standards. Submit
information on how the Owner will interface with the
SCADA system. (i.e., Setpoint changes, PID control loop
tuning, trend and report configuration, security
features, etc.)
I. Computer Network Hardware/Software.
data for:
Provide product
1. Computers
2. Printers
3. Network Hubs
4. Fiber Optic Software
5. Operating System Software
6. Network Software
7. Etc.
1. 04 WARRANTY
A. Supplier's shall warranty the complete specified herein
for a period of one year from date of total project
acceptance.
B. During warranty period, any warranty expense shall be
born by the Supplier, including travel costs or living
expenses necessary to repair in-warranty equipment.
C. This warranty shall include 24-hour
configuration telephone support at no charge.
support shall include on-line modem access
control system if necessary.
\ \BCNSHOJ\PROJECTS\PROJ\60313. 011 \16901.doc 16901-7
software
Telephone
of the
1.05 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. All equipment shall be installed in compliance with
Federal, State, and Local codes.
1. 06 QUALITY
A. The system Supplier shall insure compatibility between
all equipment. The system Supplier shall coordinate all
interface requirements with mechanical, electrical, and
other system suppliers and furnish any signal isolation
devices that might be required.
B. To improve operation and maintenance, products shall be
of the same major instrumentation manufacturer with
panel mounted devices of the same type and model.
1.07 SCHEDULE OF EVENTS
A. Award content.
B. The Supplier shall organize and coordinate the following
Design Plan review meetings:
1. 0% Kick-off meeting)
2. 50%
3. 90%
4. 100%
C. Supplier submits Design Plan for Engineer's review.
D. Engineer completes review of Design Plan.
E. Supplier purchases hardware/software, installs software
and begins to configure system.
F. Supplier holds configuration progress report meetings.
G. System is
owner and
checkout.
100% debugged at the Supplier's shop. The
engineer shall be invited to attend the final
H. Equipment is prepared for shipping.
I. Equipment arrives on site and is stored appropriately.
~-Equipment is installed on site and verification is made
that system is 100% debugged.
1.08 REMOTE WORKSTATIONS
\ \BCNSHOJ \PROJECTS\ PROJ\ 60313.011\16901 . doc 16901-8
I
I
I
I
I ,,
I ,,
g,
0
ff
' Ii ,.
11
'~,
I
A. The Supplier shall configure the system for phone modem
access into the on-site network from a remote
Workstation.
B. Provide the specified number
Remote Workstations with full
configuration and operator
and hardware type for
Workstation monitoring,
interface capabilities
without interfering with local Workstation
functionality.
C. Configure the local system to automatically dial a
remote Workstation, as specified, when an alarm or
specific event occurs.
D. Remote Workstations shall have the ability to transfer
screen, database, historian, and other files to and from
the local network.
1.09 SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION (SCADA) SYSTEM
A. General
1. SCADA system shall be built
"Fix for Windows NT" software.
install this system to provide
described in Section 16900.
around Intellution's
The Supplier shall
operator control as
2. The Supplier shall have a minimum of ten years of
experience in the business represented by this
specification, and shall have a minimum of five
years of experience in the application,
configuration, and installation of MMI monitoring
and control systems.
3. The specified Software System shall be capable of
distributed moni taring and control functions across
a network of multiple Operator Workstations.
4. The SCADA system shall be configured to allow the
operator to monitor and control the process through
simple "point and click" mouse operations.
5. Development and modification of project
configuration including database, reports, and
operator screens shall be accomplished by the
interactive procedure described in this
specification, and shall not require any work at the
source code level or development of any special
routines of software programs.
6. The SCADA system shall allow an interactive
configuration process, providing: question/answer;
prompt-response; point-click; and fill-in-the-blank
procedures. Provide on-line configuration help
\ \BCNSH0J \ PROJECTS\ PROJ\ 60313.011 \ 16901 . doc 16901-9
I
describing purpose, choices, and
including listings of possible choices
point-click choice can be made.
procedures
from which a
7. No configuration or modification work shall require
the shutdown of the "running" mode; i.e.,
configuration and modifications will be achievable
while the system is on-line processing data,
monitoring alarms, performing logical sequencing,
etc.
8. All Software System configuration files including
database, screens, historical data, etc. shall have
easily recognized, acronymic, mnemonic DOS file
names located in directories and subdirectories with
acronymic, mnemonic names. The configuration file
names shall be the same names as those used within
the system during configuration and operation.
9. At each Workstation provide the following
subdirectory names containing the indicated files:
10.
11.
12.
a. SCREENS: All operator screens and macro files.
b. DATABASE: System database and field I/O interface
configuration files, if the Workstation interfaces
with field I/O equipment.
c. HISTORY: All Historian data files.
d. ALARMS:
files.
Daily security, alarm, and activity text
e. REPORTS: Reports, reports configuration, and
reported data files.
For network resource management, the System
provide session based, call/response
transmission rather than continuous file· or
data block transfers.
shall
data
large
The Software System shall provide continuous on-line
diagnostics including network communications status;
field I/O communications status; I/O data processing
rate; etc. Provide live displays of this
information from pull down menus selected from a
multiple option menu bar at the top of each screen.
The Software System shall detect any loss of network
communications or individual I/O point
communications providing instant alarm notification
for each. Also, the system shall automatically re-
establish communications when error conditions
clear.
\ \BCNSHOJ\PROJECTS\PROJ\ 60313.011 \ 16901 . doc 16901-10
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
13. Custom configurations shall use tag names defined in
specifications and on contract drawings.
B. Operator Screens
1. Each operator screen shall be made of any number of
the following components:
a. Static and dynamic alphanumeric information.
b. Static and dynamic objects.
c. Dynamic bar graph displays.
d. Dynamic analog trending displays.
e. Software System Task Switching.
f. Password protected operator actions.
g. Screen navigation commands.
2. Dynamic analog information shall be capable of at
least 4 value related color changes with or without
flashing in response to a change in value, state, or
alarm condition for linked tags. Dynamic displays
linked to digital tags shall be capable of
displaying at least three states with corresponding
color/flash indications.
3. All PLC I/0 points shall be displayed graphically by
the SCADA system.
4 •
5 .
6.
7 •
8 •
All analog I/0
dynamic graphics
etc.) as well as
values shall
(i.e., Dynamic
numerically.
be viewed
bar graphs,
through
sliders,
All discrete I/0 values shall be
dynamic color changes of graphics.
Valve symbols change from red to
change.)
viewed through
(i.e. , Motor and
green on state
Graphic screens shall allow the operator to
value of all alarm point and setpoints from
screen without the need for any mouse or
operations.
view the
the main
keyboard
All data displayed in operator screens on each
Workstation shall be valid and current. Current
values displayed in operator screens shall be
instantly replaced with an error indication for
"bad" data, loss of data or loss of communication
for each individual tag. These conditions shall be
treated as alarms, with specified reporting and
routing. Workstations shall not display or
historically collect invalid data.
When communications are
cleared, data displays
restored and/or errors are
will automatically display
\ \BCNSH03\ PROJECTS\PROJ\ 60313.011 \ 16901 . doc 16901-11
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
g
D
D
D
I
I
I
actual values, and "change in status" messages shall
be routed to all alarm reports and files.
9. A "pick" point in an operator screen indicates
possible operator interaction for data entry, screen
navigation or task switching. When the mouse
pointer is "dragged" across operator "pick" points,
a highlight box shall appear around each. In
addition to pointing and clicking, the operator may
press the "down" arrow key to select a "pick" point
and then press enter.
10. Point-click procedures shall be available for all
operator/screen interface for navigation, data
entry, etc. Operator data entry procedures shall be
configured as keyboard entry; point-click
calculator; multiple choice point-click, point-click
up/down ramping or data value slide.
11. Provide user changeable lower, upper and rate-of-
change limits on all setpoints. Initial limits
shall be set at: lower= 10%, upper= 85%, and rate-
of-change = 10% of value. The user shall not be
able to enter setpoint changes beyond these limits.
Only users with proper access shall be able to
change these setpoint limits.
12. Configure each Workstation to check, verify, and
require appropriate password log in prior to each
start/stop action, setpoint change, tuning parameter
change, or any other equipment control or functional
change.
13. the system shall respond to each operator request to
perform any of these actions in the following
manner:
a. Present a "pop up" setpoint entry faceplate screen
for each system setpoint change requirement.
b. Present a "pop up" control parameter tuning
faceplate screen for each system control parameter
tuning requirement.
c. English language operator prompting prior to any
system response to operator request. Prompting
shall inform the operator of the action about to
be taken and provide a confirming "proceed" or
"quit" choice.
d. Each action and system response shall be clearly
displayed in the appropriate "pop up" screen.
\ \BCNSH03\ PROJECTS\ PROJ\ 60313. 011\16901 . doc 16901-12
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
u
I
I
I
I
I
I
14. At a minimum, each "pop up" screen shall provide for
opera tor input/ action and positive feedback
indication. Each digital input and feedback control
display shall provide an English word rather than a
digital number indicating conditions. These shall
be: start, stop, enable, disable, etc.
15. Each variable input shall allow operator keyboard or
vertical slide bar data entry. Each variable, input
and feedback, shall be displayed in number and bar
graph formats, both individually and in color coded
multiply bar chart for system evaluation.
16. Objection screens shall indicate field status, such
as "stopped" or "running" by appropriate animation,
positioning, and color coding.
17. Configure each operator screen with a multiple
choice menu bar at the top of the screen. Each
choice shall display a related pull down menu
listing of additional choices, screen navigation,
system administration, diagnostics, and task
switching with appropriate password protection.
Exact menu bar choices and related pull down menu
choices and functions will be chosen on a project by
project basis, dependent on Owner's needs. The
following menu bar options and commands shall be
used to indicate the level of complexity required:
a. SECURITY LOGIN choice: shall display
login dialogue box, enabling the system
login by entering an assigned login
password.
password
user to
name and
b. SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION choice: shall provide a
pulldown menu with the following choices:
(1) SECURITY CONFIGURATION choice: shall display
Workstation security configuration dialogue
boxes enabling the user, through password
protection, to modify or disable/enable
Workstation security functions.
( 2)
( 3)
FILE MANAGEMENT choice: shall provide
user with password protected access to
Windows file manager.
PROGRAM MANAGER choice: shall provide
user with password protected access to
Windows Program Manager through which
Windows Program Manager through which
Windows program can be run.
\ \BCNSH0J\PROJliCTS\PROJ\60313. 011 \ 16901.dac 16901-13
the
the
the
the
any
any
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
n
D
0
D
I
I
( 4) HISTORIAN CHART CONFIGURATION choice: shall
provide password protected access to
Workstation historian chart, pen and time
group configuration through which the user
shall be able to view, add and modify
historian data charts.
( 5) SYSTEM TAPE BACKUP choice: shall provide
password protected access to the Workstation
on-board tape drive backup function, through
which the user shall be able to partially or
totally backup Workstation software files.
c. MESSAGE CENTER choice: shall provide access to a
personal message center, through which users shall
be able to provide brief messages to other users
at any Workstation on the network.
d. DIAGNOSTICS choice: shall display a pulldown menu
providing the following choices:
( 1)
(2)
( 3)
( 4)
NETWORK STATUS choice: shall provide
Workstation network diagnostics indicating
status of all network sessions, activity, and
trouble.
I/O COMMUNICATIONS STATUS choice available on
field I/O interface Workstation: shall
provide password protected interactive
display indicating data request/transmit
communications status and error conditions
between the field I/O interface Workstation
and the PLC data highway.
COMPUTER DIAGNOSTICS choice: shall provide
password protected total Workstation review
and diagnoses of computer hardware, memory,
drives, ports, etc. This function shall also
provide hard copy reporting of any portion of
or the entire diagnostics review.
FIELD I/O AND
shall provide a
I/O interface
including:
PLC CONFIGURATION choice:
set of screens for each field
device "PLC", "RTU", etc.
1. Manufacturer.
2. Model Number.
3.
4 .
Rack I.D.
Model number, type and location for each
rack module.
\ \BCNSH0J \PROJECTS\PROJ\ 60313.011 \ 1690 l . doc 16901-14
I
I
I
g
I
m
D
D
0
D
u
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
5. I/0 device, associated
module position for
points.
database tag and
all field I/0
( 5) TAG VIEW choice: shall provide a "pop-up"
screen displaying database attributes,
current value monitoring and thirty second
live trend display for each individual
database tag, per user request. This
"pop-up" screen shall be initiated by
pressing <CNTRL> <T> and will display tag
attributes for a highlighted screen tag
"pick" point; any tag chosen by a single
point-click from a listing of all database
tags or a "typed in" tag name.
Database attributes shall include, per tag:
data highway device type, I.D. and I/0
address; alarm status; engineering uni ts
range and description; scan and phase times
and tag description.
(6) SYSTEM ACTIVITY choice: shall provide a
password protected "pop-up" display of "live"
system activity including alarms, alarm
resets, operator entries, communication
errors, system messages and database
configuration activity. This display shall
be used to provide real time feedback for
operator requests, troubleshooting, alarm
management assistance, etc.
This "pop-up" display shall be capable of
being sized, moved, closed and set to be
always "on-top" during screen navigation by
user request and at any time without pausing
or stopping data updates, data collection or
alarm monitoring.
(7) ALARM menu bar choice: shall provide user
interactive alarm summary screen as specified
in the alarms section of this specification.
e. HELP menu bar choice: shall provide project
specific full function Microsoft Windows help
including: "contents"; "search"; "back"; etc.
For visual assistance, in a'.ddi tion to text,
provide reduced sizes of actual screens with help
notations when Help refers to operator screen
function. Help shall include:
\ \BCNSH0J\ PROJECTS\PROJ\ 60313. 011 \ 1690 l . doc 16901-15
I
I
I
D
D
D
D
D
u
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
( 1) OPERATIONS:
description
activity.
a complete operations procedure
including specific operator
(2) SUPERVISORY: a full description of
supervisors' daily procedures and system
management responsibilities.
(3) ALARM MANAGEMENT: a complete description of
alarm handling and management including the
use of alarm screens, files and reports.
Also a full description of alarm file and
disk space backup, archiving and management.
( 4) SECURITY MANAGEMENT: a complete description
of security handling and management including
the use of security screens, files, and
reports. Also a full description of security
file and disk space backup, archiving and
management.
(5) HISTORIAN: a complete description of and
management including the use of historian
screens, files, and reports. Also a full
description of historian file and disk space
backup, archiving and management.
(6) MAINTENANCE: a full description of
maintenance procedures for best utilization
of diagnostic tools, screens, reports, etc.
for troubleshooting and problem solving.
( 7) REPORTS: a complete description for reports
use, saving, printing and chart
configuration.
(8) DATA ARCHIVING: how to manage system data
and-files backup, archiving and restoration.
( 9) HARD DISK SPACE
description of
management, etc.
MANAGEMENT:
hard disk
a complete
usage, space
f. TREND menu bar choice: shall provide a pull down
menu choice listing for:
( 1) LIVE TREND choice: shall provide a multiple
trend menu including:
a.
\ \BCNSH0J\PROJECTS\PROJ\ 60313. 011\16901 . doc
Live trend charts for up to eight pens
for the following list of equipment,
groups and trend periods:
16901-16
I
I
I
I
D
D
0
I
0
0
D
0
I
0
I
D
u
(2) HISTORICAL TREND choice:
menu choice listing for:
shall provide a
a. Individual viewing of each historian
chart with all functions as described
the HISTORIAN section of this
specification.
in
b.
c.
d.
Without any further keystrokes or
actions, individual historian chart
printing.
Viewing or printing of any individual,
pre-defined HISTORIAN chart shall be
achieved by a single point-click action
while viewing operator screens via this
menu bar choice.
Provide the following HISTORIAN chart
equipment, grouping, sampling, start
times and durations:
Provide the following list of reports
which includes regulatory forms,
runtime, etc:
g. REPORTS menu bar choice:
a menu listing for all
features as described in
section.
shall provide access to
configured reports with
the Reports specification
( 1)
(2)
RUNTIME
screen
blowers
below:
menu bar
containing
choice:. shall display a
run time totals for all
and other equipment as specified
Provide the following reports, which include
regulatory forms, equipment run time reports,
etc.:
18. Each choice shall be made by a single point-click or
by pressing the 0 downn arrow to the appropriate
choice and then pressing [ENTER].
19. None of these choices shall cause screen updating,
database updating, data collection, alarm monitoring
or any other system function to pause or stop.
20. When a menu bar choice is made, the menu bar button
and text for that choice will protrude and become
bold to positively indicate user's choice, and the
pull-down menu will be displayed. When pull-down
menus are closed or when a new operator screen is
\ \BCNSH03\ PROJECTS\ l'ROJ\ 60313. 011\16901 . doc 16901-17
I
I
I
I
m
g
u
0
0
0
0
I
B
I
I
I
I
I
displayed, menu bar choices return to previous,
normal states.
21. The SCADA system shall provide a user-friendly
interface at each Workstation including the ability,
while drawing operator screens, to:
a. View, add and modify database tag links
b. Add a tag to the database and place it on scan
c. Configure and modify the entire database
d. Configure and modify reports
e. Configure and modify historian functions
f. Perform security login
g. Modify Workstation SCADA system configuration
C. ALARMS
1. The Software System shall be configured
alarm handling, reporting and archiving.
indicated by the color YELLOW.
to provide
Alarms are
2. All alarms shall be classified by priority level:
Priority Level Description ---~-----------------
1 Important,
immediately
requires response
2 Problem, requires
time allows
response when
3. Alarm management shall be provided for each database
field input and shall include:
a. Alarm reporting enable or disable
b. Alarm suppression to avoid nuisance alarms, such
as during start-up
c. Re-alarming
d. Alarm routing to specific workstations and
printers as appropriate
e. Alarm grouping for specific visual and audible
group notification
f. Alarm types to include at least: low low; high;
high high; rate of change; change from normal;
change of state
g. Alarm acknowledgement and condition clear format
\ \BCNSHOJ\ PROJECTS\ PROJ\ 60313. 011\16901 . doc 16901-18
I
g
I
u
g
I
I
I
g
0
I
I
ff
I
I
D
h. Alarm priority
4. Only priority alarms selected, including the loss of
network, data highway and individual field I/O point
communications, will be reported to the regular
operator screen alarm summaries, which shall allow
the operator to sort alarms in descending or
ascending time order. The operator will also be
allowed to apply various priority level filters and
to reconfigure alarm summary columns for detailed
analyses, while viewing. The operator shall be able
to set which priority alarm levels shall be reported
to operator screen alarm summaries.
5. ACTIVE ALARM LOG: All active alarms shall be shown
on an Active Alarm Log. While viewing the Active
Alarm Log, the operator shall be able to acknowledge
any indi victual alarm or all alarms, with
confirmation, before proceeding. An unacknowledged
alarm shall flash in configured
foreground/background colors until it is
acknowledged. When an alarm condition has been both
acknowledged and cleared, the alarm statement shall
be removed from the alarm summary.
6. MASTER ALARM LOG: A Master Alarm Log shall be
7 .
created which shows all of the alarms that have
occurred over the last 7 days. The Master Alarm Log
shall operate the same way as the Active Alarm Log,
except that, once an alarm has been posted to the
screen it shall not be removed for 7 days. New
alarms shall be entered at the top of the alarm
summary screen, pushing the exiting alarms towards
the bottom. Once an alarm entry has been scrolled
o{f of the bottom of the screen, the operator can
look at it by paging down. Alarms on the Master
Alarm Log shall change colors based on their status.
If an alarm has been acknowledged and the alarm
condition has cleared the alarm enter shall changed
to the color white.
Alarm summaries shall
colors, and provide at
information:
a. Date and time.
b. Workstation name.
c. Tag.
d. Tag description.
e. Alarm condition.
f. Tag value.
g. Alarm set point.
h. Priority.
be capable
least the
of using
following
system
column
\ \BCNSHOJ \ PROJECTS\ PROJ\ 60313. 011\16901. doc 16901-19
I
I
I
I
0
I
D
0
0
0
I
D
0
0
D
D
D
0
0
8. Alarm entries shall be sent to the
destinations:
following
9.
a. Active Alarm Log
b. master Alarm Log
c. Alarm Printers
d. Alarm History File
e. System Activity Report
Date and time stamped alarm reporting
to alarm printers with similar
configuration and routing procedures
for alarm summaries.
shall be sent
formatting,
as specified
10. Alarm and history files shall be capable of being
saved to computer backup media including diskettes
or tapes.
11. The alarm and history display will provide live
viewing of alarm and history file entries, giving
the operator instantaneous activity review and
operator action verification.
12. The system alarm and history display, with on-line
height and width adjustment capabilities, will be
displayed as part of operator screens, upon demand.
The operator will be able to size and move the
display, as desired. Further, the operator shall be
able to close this display, upon demand, or cause it
to be continually displayed as the operator
navigates through operator screens.
13. The opening, closing, moving, or resizing of this
display shall not cause screen updating, database
updating, historical data collection, alarm
monitoring or nay other system function to pause or
stop.
14. Workstations shall be configured to report all alarm
conditions, operator activity, etc. to all other
Workstations.
15. Configure the system to provide a periodic date
stamp on the alarmprint-out at the alarm printer to
provide clear date/time evaluation of printed
alarms.
16. Configure each
activity file
tape drive.
Workstation for alarm and history
backup and archiving to the on-board
17. Provide alarm and history file backup, and disk
space management procedures and training.
\ \BCNSHOJ\ PROJECTS\ PROJ\ 6031J.011\16901 . doe 16901-20
I
I
a
D
D
I
a
I
I
a
II
0
a
0
I
I
I
0
D. TRENDS
1. The system shall be capable of providing multiple
sets of live trends in operator screens.
2. Each set of live trends shall be capable of:
a. Displaying eight pens.
b. Being temporarily modified, while viewing.
c. Displaying straight line or varying data value
"target" curves.
d. Full screen trend curve displays when trend screen
is opened.
3. Configure each Live Trend chart to allow temporary,
on-line pen, range and chart X-Y parameter changes
by the user. The Supplier shall also configure each
trend display to allow on-line user modifiable
straight line "target" curve for each trended data
point and, as specified, a user selected varying
data value "target" curve based on pre-defined
modeling for trended data points.
4. The Supplier shall submit Live Trend chart
configuration for approval prior to development.
E. HISTORIAN
1. Configure the Software System to provide historical
data gathering for System and operations validating,
testing, maintenance and regulatory reporting.
2. The system shall provide multiple choice options for
historian data file size and shall automatically
assign DOS file names indicating the date and
duration for data contained in each file. Configure
the installed system for sequential data files
containing four hours of data each, beginning at
midnight.
3. For data and system resource management, the system
shall allow the assignment of any number and type of
database tags and tag groups for historical data
collection with the following attributes:
a. Collection rate and phasing.
b. Data collection start/stop condition.
c. Data collection deadband.
\ \BCNSH0J\PROJECTS\PROJ\60313. 011 \ 16901.doc 16901-21
a
I
I
I
I
I
I
B
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
4 •
5.
6.
7 •
8 •
For additional resource management, configure the
Software System to automatically delete historian
data files when they reach an age, which is user
selectable from a multiple choice options list. Set
initial automatic file deletion at weekly (monthly)
with backup and archiving procedures occurring prior
to deletion.
Configure each Workstation for historical data files
backup and archiving to the on-board tape drive.
Provide historical data files backup, and disk space
management procedures and training.
chart must
any time.
to make
All attributes of each historical display
be able to be configured or modified at
In addition, the user shall be able
temporary, view only modification, while
historical charts.
viewing
The system shall be configured for the following
on-line historical data user functionality, without
pausing or stopping any system function:
a. Zoom to any specific of a chart.
b. Automatic real time update of historical data,
upon demand.
c. Reset to original chart parameters, upon demand.
d. Request completely different start/ stop time and
duration parameters, upon demand.
e. Chart data display update forward or backward in
time, by a single point-click for two sets of
modifiable time increments in each direction.
f. Export displayed chart data into a DOS text file
with a user defined acronymic, mnemonic DOS file
name.
g. Print any displayed historical trend chart, upon
demand.
h. Display multiple
same time with
analyses.
historical display charts at the
time synchronizing ·for detailed
i. Data charts configured by combining any pen and
time groups.
j. Chart display format changes including colors,
titles, legends, etc.
\ \BCNSHOJ \ PROJECTS\PRO,J\ 60313. 011 \ 16901. doc 16901-22
a
I
I
a
0
B
0
0
D
D
D
0
D
D
D
0
n
0
0
9. When configuring tag pen groups, the system shall
provide for user configuration of at least:
a. Individual tag and related attributes.
b. Default or specific data value range.
c. Individual color for each tag pen.
d. A specific letter to further document each. pen
related curve.
e. Chart display format.
10. Time group configuration shall include at least the
following:
a. Start/stop dates and times
b. Duration
c. Sample, average value, high value and low value
displays individually or together
d. Chart display format
11. Historian data files shall be capable of being saved
to computer backup media including diskettes or
tapes. The system shall allow these files to be
restored to the appropriate system file path and
reviewed with all system functions at any time, as
if they had continued to be hard disk resident.
12. The collection of historical data shall begin
automatically upon Software System start-up.
field inputs shall be
Provide collected data in
collection rate, phasing,
to maximize data collection
13. All analog and digital
historically collected.
the "sample" mode with
etc. attributes assigned
and system resources.
14. Provide the following time groups:
a. The previous hour
b. The previous eight (8) hours
c. The previous sixteen ( 16) hours
d. The previous twenty-four (24) hours
e. The previous seven ( 7) days
f. The previous thirty (30) days
15. Operator
individual
access
project
for viewing or printing any
specific, pre-defined Historian
\ \BCNSH0J \PROJECTS\PROJ\ 60313.011\16901 . doc 16901-23
I
I
a
I
0
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
(I
I
I
I
chart shall be through
while viewing operator
bar choice.
a single point-click action
screens via the TREND menu
16. Submit all historian parameters for approval prior
to beginning work.
F. REPORTS
1. The Supplier shall create the following reports:
a. Daily Report
b. Weekly Report
c. Monthly Report
The Owner will provide the Supplier with the format
and content requirements for this report.
2. All reports shall be created in Excel. The Supplier
shall write an Excel program that enables the Owner
to generate reports by clicking a button (i.e., a
"Generate Daily Reportn button) or enable the Owner
to have the system generate the report automatically
at a predetermined time and date. The Owner shall
be able to change the time and date setting through
a text box. .Reports shall also be scheduled to be
automatically printed on an event occurrence, such
as specific tag going into alarm or changing state.
3. SYSTEM ACTIVITY REPORT: Configure alarm and history
files for sequential date and time stamped activity
reporting for the entire system, on each
Workstation. This file will be a daily DOS text
file with a DOS file name indicating the date that
the file was created, and shall include all system
wide activity including:
a. Alarms entries
b. Alarm acknowledgement commands from operator
c. Loss and recovery of Network, data highway and
individual field I/0 point communications
d. Status changes
e. Alarm clear and return to normal messages
f. Operator keyboard entries
g. Other system related activity
4. Each Report
displaying:
\ \BCNSH0J\PROJECTS\PRW\60313. 011 \16901.doc
shall be capable
16901-24
of linking and
D
u
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
5 .
6.
7 .
8 .
9.
a. Current value
b. Engineering units
c. Descriptors
d. Field I/0 equipment addresses
e. Alarm parameters
b. Any combination of historian pen/time groups
1. Manually entered data
2. Text
3. Date and Time
The report package shall allow on-line user
selection of a value or groups of values, and
instantaneously create charts in X-Y, bar graph, pie
and other formats. Charts shall be modifiable upon
viewer demand. Chart printouts, on demand, ~hall be
provided.
Reports shall display entries indicating "no data"
and "bad data" to distinguish error conditions from
zero values for individual report data links.
Reports
database
work shall not cause screen updates,
updates, historical collection, alarm
monitoring nor any other system operation to pause
or stop.
This REPORT module shall open on top of operator
screens, so that, upon exiting, the previous
operator screen will be automatically displayed and
fully functioning and updating.
Configure the following reports with color coded
entries to differentiate current, historian and
manually entered data:
a. Daily, weekly, and monthly high, low and average
values for:
(1) Flows
(2) Pressures
(3) Data used for quality analyses, as specified
b. Daily, weekly, and monthly totals for:
(1) Compressor/Blower
10. Configure all reports to be sent to the
printer and sent to TEXT files with user
file names, upon user demand.
reports
defined
\ \BCNSHOJ\PROJECTS\ PROJ\ 60313, 011 \ 16901. doc 16901-25
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
11. Provide user access to any
means of a single point-click
all project specific reports.
individual report by
choice from a menu of
12. This password protected access to reports shall also
enable the user to create and/or modify reports
through standard Microsoft Excel configuration and
system Macro procedures.
13. Provide reports management training.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.01 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER
A. General
1.
2 .
3.
4.
5.
6.
The Programmable Controller
compatibility whereby all new
interchanged with all similar
to reduce obsolescence. All
Bradley SLC 5/05 ethernet.
shall have downward
module designs can be
modules in an effort
PLCs shall be Allen-
The CPU shall be a self-contained unit, and will
provide Ladder Rung program execution and support
remote or local programming. This device will also
supply I/0 scanning and inter-processor and
peripheral communication functions.
All system modules, main and expansion chassis shall
be designed to provide for free air flow convection
cooling. No internal fans or other means of
cooling, except heat sinks, shall be permitted.
Processor mode shall be selected by a keyswitch
mounted on the front panel of the CPU. The key
shall select the following modes: RUN -No ladder
edits possible, program always executing; PROGRAM -
Programming allowed, program execution disabled; and
REMOTE -Programming terminal can make edits and
change processor mode, including TEST mode, whereby
the logic executes and inputs are monitored, but
edits are not permanently active unless assembled.
Non-volatile memory shall store the operating system
information to protect against loss in the case of
power loss or system shutdown. Only at the time of
a hardware change shall this configuration status be
altered or re-entered.
The Programmable Controller shall have the ability
to provide custom machine language routines to
enhance the performance of the instruction set. The
\ \BCNSHOJ\PROJECTS\PROJ\60313, 011 \ 16901.doc 16901-26
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
R
D
ti
I
I
I
format to the user will be represented as a custom
application routine.
B. PLC Programming
1. All custom configurations shall be programmed and
documented in a manner such that the Owner may
easily modify the control system at a later date.
The Supplier shall configure the system, document
and train the Owner to an extent that the Owner has
complete knowledge to make future configuration
changes.
2. The PLC software shall be developed with built-in
high-level diagnostics. These diagnostics shall
identify system and component failures and provide
specific alarms to the monitoring software
concerning the failure. For example, if a motor
start command is issued, the PLC shall issue an
alarm if the motor running contact is not closed
within 3 seconds.
3. The latest version of the PLC programming software
shall be provided which will allow for future
programming changes. The software shall allow
ladder logic changes, tag descriptions, rung
references and description.
C. Power Supplies
1. The Programmable Controller
compliance with an electrical
120 VAC, single phase, in the
47 to 63 Hz, or 24 VDC.
shall operate in
service of either
frequency range from
2. The manufacturer shall be able to provide as
standard equipment a system power supply capable of
converting 120 VAC line power to the DC power
required to operate the Programmable Controller
system.
3. A single main power supply shall have the capability
of supplying power to the CPU and local input/output
modules. Auxiliary power supplies shall provide
power to remotely located racks.
4. The power supply shall automatically shut down the
Programmable Controller system whenever its output
current is detected as exceeding 125 percent of its
rated current.
5. The power supply shall monitor the incoming AC line
voltage for proper levels. When the power supply is
wired to utilize 120 VAC power, the system shall
\ \BCNSHOJ\ PROJECTS\PROJ\ 60313.011\16901 . doc 16901-27
I
I
I
u
I
D
11
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
function properly within the range of 97 to 132 VAC.
If the voltage level is detected as being out of
range for more than one-half line cycle, the power
supply shall automatically shut down the system and
remain disabled until the proper voltage level
returns. In addition, the power supply shall
provide surge protection, isolation, and outage
carry-over up to 2 cycles of the AC line.
6. In cases where the AC line is especially unstable or
subject to unusual variations, it shall be possible
to install a constant voltage transformer having a
sinusoidal output waveform.
7. Design features of the Programmable Controller power
supply shall include diagnostic indicators mounted
in a position to be easily viewed by the user.
These indicators shall provide the operator with the
status of the .DC power applied. In addition, a
means of disabling power to the CPU shall be
possible from a power disconnect switch mounted in a
position easily accessible by the operator.
8. At the time of power-up, the power supply shall
inhibit operation of the processor and I/O modules
until the DC voltages are within specifications.
9. The power supply shall offer fuse protection.
2.02 COMPUTER SYSTEM HARDWARE
A. Workstation Computers (Minimum requirements):
1. 1 Intel Pentium 433MHz processor.
2. Each processor shall have 256k cache.
3 . At least 6 bus-master expansion slots.
4 . Internal mass storage shall be a minimum of 2GB
internal Fast-Wide SCSI-2 hard drive expandable to
17.2GB.
5. A minimum of 64MB of ECC RAM expandable to 128MB.
6. Internal 48x CDROM.
7 . Internal 1.3GB tape backup.
8. Network NIC is to be 32Bit EISA Bus-master
l0Mbit/sec l0Base-T Ethernet. Controller expandable
to l00Mbits/sec.
\ \BCNSH0J\PROJECTS\ PROJ\ 60313.011\16901 . doc 16901-28
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
•·
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
9. Workstation OS shall be Microsoft Window NT
Workstation ver 3.51.
10. Provide laptop computer for transport to/from the
Site.
11. Laptop shall be Dell.
B. All computers shall include:
1. A minimum of two (2) parallel printer ports shall be
included to connect the printers to the CPU.
2. One (1) RS-232C UART serial communication port shall
be provided.
3. CPUs certified by the System Supplier to be WIN-NT
compatible for networking requirements.
4. Primary floppy disk drives shall be 3 1/2 inch half
height until with 1.44MB of storage per diskette.
Drive must be able to read and write all MS-DOS
3.5 inch disk formats.
5. Internal tape drives shall be provided for system
and network file backup (archiving) and restoration
functions. Controllers and software, as required,
shall be provided to allow unattended, automatic
data backup.
6. Provide, as a minimum, Super Video Graphic Adapter
(SVGA) resolution of 1,024 pixels by 768 pixels, and
a minimum of 256 colors. Display screens shall be
0.28 mm phosphor dot size, and noninterlaced. Video
adapter cards shall include 1MB video memory,
minimum, expandable to 2MB PCI bus windows
accelerator. Appropriate video drivers, supporting
all windows standard requirements, shall be
provided.
C. All computers shall be FCC Class B certified for EMI/RFI
and UL/CSA approved as a complete system.
D. An internal 56k baud, Hayes-compatible auto-dial, auto-
answer data/fax modem shall be provided. The modem
shall meet all FCC regulations, support Group III Fax,
and transmit data with V.42/MNP2-4 error
correction/V.42bis/MNP-5 compression.
E. Dot-Matrix Type Printer
1. The system
reports and
herein. The
\ \BCNSHOJ \ PROJECTS\ PROJ\ 60313. 011 \'1690 l . doc
shall include
event/alarm
printers shall
16901-29
printers for logging
functions as specified
be interchangeable with
I
I
D
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.03
2 .
like and similar equipment. The printers shall be
dot-matrix impact type designed for use in
100 percent duty-cycle applications and shall have
tractor feed mechanisms suitable for fanfold forms
up to 16.5 inches wide.
Printers requiring
treated, or other
acceptable.
thermal
special
sensitive, chemically
paper, will not be
3. The printers shall be 24-pin dot-matrix type. The
printers shall use a Centronics parallel style
interface and shall operate at 300 cps for normal
use and 100 cps for Near Letter Quality printing for
reports and letters. The printers shall be able to
print emphasized, enhanced, superscript, subscript
and underlying modes. The printers shall be able to
print 288 by 144 dpi graphics. The printers shall
be sized to use up to 9 1/2, 13 inch wide tractor
feed paper. The printers shall be rated for
5,000 hours MTBF with a printhead life of
200,000,000 characters and operate at a noise level
of less than 60 dBa. The ribbon shall be a self-
linking style cartridge. A 52k print buffer shall
be built into the printer. Printer shall be a
Panasonic KX-P3624.
SPARE HARDWARE
A. Each PLC rack shall have 20 percent spare physical slots
for future I/0 cards to be added. Each rack shall
contain 1 spare module of all I/0 cards used by that
rack. Spare I/0 cards shall be wired to field
terminals. Provide 1 spare for each of the following:
1. One (1)
equipment.
supplies.
spare piece of
For . example:
2. 04 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
hardware
processors,
for all PLC
racks, power
A. Relays shall be Potter & Brumfield, or equal.
B. Enclosures shall be Hoffman, or equal.
C. Surge Suppressors shall be Edco, or equal.
D. GFCI Receptacles shall be Hubbell, or equal.
E. Circuit Breakers shall be Square D, or equal.
F. Fuses and Fuseblocks shall be Littlefuse, or equal.
\ \BCNSHOJ\ PROJECTS\ PROJ\ 60313.011\16901 . doc 16901-30
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
B. Panel and field raceway systems shall separate discrete,
analog and power wiring. An exception shall be made for
motor starter control wiring associated with motors,
which shall be run in conduit with power conductors. In
no case shall wire bundles contain mixed signal types.
C. Supplier shall verify location of all
classified areas as defined by the National
Code. Proper wiring methods and equipment as
in the National Electric Code shall be provided
hazardous classified areas.
hazardous
Electric
detailed
in these
D. All process variable signal displays shall read out in
linear process units, unless otherwise noted.
E. All instrumentation and control equipment shall be
suitable for the environment it is installed in.
Supplier shall take into consideration relative
humidities, corrosive vapors, ambient temperatures,
dust, splashing water, etc. All equipment cabinets and
devices provided by the Supplier shall be heavy-duty
type designed for continuous industrial service.
F. All equipment shall be of modular construction and shall
be capable of future field expansion. Equipment shall
be located to easily facilitate future expansion.
Provide space next to control panels to facilitate the
installation of a future control panel of the same size
as the one installed to handle future expansion.
G. All electrical equipment supplied shall be
117V nominal, 60 Hz alternating current.
shall be designed to withstand +10 percent
and/or distortion.
designed for
Equipment
voltage sags
H. Instrumentation and control equipment shall be UL
listed. The Supplier shall be a certified UL panel
building shop capable of UL labeling the custom panel
they build as a complete assembly with a unique UL ID
serial number.
I. Supplier shall certify the
instrumentation installations.
applications shall comply with
Association, AWWA, and the EPA.
suitability of all
Instrumentation
Manufacturing Chemist
J. The control system shall be configured in such a way as
to provide orderly shutdown and automatic restart when
power outages occur.
\ \BCNSHOJ\PROJECTS\PROJ\60313. 011 \ 16901.doc 16901-31
I
I
I
1-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
K. Operation of the control system shall not require any
knowledge of software programming.
L. Instrumentation and control equipment shall be installed
in accordance to manufacturers recommendations.
Drawings show approximate locations of instrument and
control equipment. Exact locations of equipment shall
be coordinated by all contractors and other equipment in
the field. Exact locations of instrumentation requiring
interface wiring to other systems shall have their exact
locations verified prior to roughing-in conduit. Where
location of instrumentation and control equipment
conflicts with other equipment, the Supplier shall
notify the Engineer and proceed as directed to furnish
labor and materials necessary to complete the
installation.
M. Two complete sets of shop drawings and contract drawings
shall be kept in the field at all times. These drawings
shall be ,marked up as installation progresses to
represent all changes from the original design.
Following the completion of installation and all field
acceptance tests, one set of mark-up drawings shall be
provided to the Engineer, and the other retained by the
Supplier for incorporation of the mark-ups into final
record drawings.
N. All instrumentation signal cable shall bear an outer
shield which is to be continuous from source to
destination and grounded per manufacturers
recommendations. However, in no case shall the shield
be grounded at more than one place.
3.02
wiring for
accordance
provide all
satisfactory
0. The Supplier shall insure that all field
power and signal circuits are installed in
with best standard industrial practice and
necessary system grounding to insure a
functioning installation.
P. Where equipment specified herein requires testing for
product acceptance, the Engineer shall witness testing.
CONTROL PANELS AND FIELD WIRING
A. All major pieces of equipment in panels shall be
identified by permanent engraved labels. Attach labels
to panels with stainless steel self-tapping screws.
B. All control and instrumentation wiring shall be named
and labeled at both ends. Labels at both ends of the
same wire shall be identical. Label names shall be
selected to indicate where the wire runs to and from.
\ \BCNSHOJ \PROJECTS\ PROJ\ 60313. 011\16901. doc 16901-32
I
I
I
I
I
I
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C. Wire labels shall be the sleeve type with heat impressed
letters and numbers.
D. Panel mounted equipment shall be arranged in a manner
that allows servicing, adjustment, testing, removal
without disconnecting, or removal of other components.
All components shall be mounted on removable plates, not
directly attached to cabinet enclosure.
E. Panels located in process areas
stainless steel with quarter-turn
quick-release latches. Hardware
steel.
shall be NEMA 4
or flip-latch type
shall be stainless
F. All exterior panel mounted equipment shall be installed
with suitable gaskets, faceplates, or other accessories
as required to maintain the NEMA rating of the panel.
G. All conduit
with ground
accessories
the panel.
and cable penetrations shall be provided
bushings, hubs, gasketed locknuts or other
as required to maintain the NEMA rating of
H. Provide print storage pockets on the inside of each
panel. These pockets should be of sufficient size to
hold all prints and operations manuals associated with
panel. Place a reduced set of all drawings associated
with panel in its pockets. All panels shall be suitable
for top and/or bottom conduit entry.
I. Wiring.
1. All wiring entering or exiting control panels shall
terminate on the Master Terminal Board. The Master
Terminal Board is a plate mounted in the panel for
termination of external wiring. All external wiring
shall enter panel and terminate on one side of
terminal blocks mounted on the Master Terminal
Board. Wiring from components within the panel
shall terminate on the other side of the terminal
blocks.
2.
3 .
Wiring between the Master Terminal
components within the panel shall
installed.
Board and
be factory
All terminal blocks and wires shall be uniquely
named and labeled. This means that even small
jumper wires shall have unique names and be labeled
(i.e. J21, J22, J32, etc.). All wire label
identifications shall be identified on loop and
panel wiring diagrams. Labels at both ends of the
same wire shall be identical.
\ \BCNSHOJ \PROJECTS\PROJ\ 60313.011 \ 16901 . doc 16901-33
I
I
I
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'
I
I
I
4. The Master Terminal Board shall have a minimum of
20 percent spares.
5. Terminal blocks shall be arranged in vertical rows
and separated into groups ( incoming 12 OVAC power,
120VAC Discrete Inputs, 120VAC Discrete outputs,
24VDC Discrete Inputs, 24VDC Discrete Outputs,
4-20mA Analog Inputs, 4-20mA Analog Outputs, etc).
The line AC control terminal block shall be used to
terminate 120v power conductors fed from 208/120,
three-phase panelboards. Provide circuit breakers
on circuits 120VAC (and higher) for overcurrent
protection and convenient disconnection means.
6. Terminal
Buchanan
rating.
blocks shall be barrier type (equivalent to
Ca#0625) with the appropriate voltage
They shall be raised channel mounted type.
7. Wire connectors shall be the snap-on fork type
(equivalent to Thomas and Betts) with insulated
barrel for crimp type compression connection to the
wire.
8. Group all wiring in rigid gray vinyl wire duct.
(Equivalent to PANDUIT Style G.)
9. Only one side of a terminal block row shall be used
for internal wiring. The field wiring side of the
terminal shall not be within 6" of the side panel,
an adjacent terminal, or a piece of equipment.
10. All 120v and above power wiring shall be identified
as such.
11. Signal wiring of different types shall be color-
coded to easily identify the signal types (i.e.,
120VAC = red, 24VDC = blue, etc.) requirements shall
have a label permanently attached to the equipment
stating special instructions and precautions.
3.03 PLC INSTALLATION
A. The Supplier shall provide mounting and wiring of the
Programmable Controller system in a NEMA 4 enclosure for
indoor process areas.
B. Provide a sealed plastic window in the door (s) of the
enclosure for observing the processor and I/0 status
indicating lights. Use a control panel window kit that
will maintain the NEMA rating of the enclosure.
C. Within the enclosure, all I/0
and power supplies shall be
manufacturer's specifications.
\ \BCNSHOJ\ PROJECTS\ PROJ\ 60313. 011\16901 . doc 16901-34
racks, processor racks,
grounded to meet the
I
I
I
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
D. All cables
receptacles)
withstand an
(with associated plugs, connectors,
shall be designed for commercial use
industrial environment.
and
to
E. Each limit switch, push-button, or other input device
shall be connected to only one individual input point.
F. Each output device shall be connected to only one
individual output point.
G. PLC input and output cards shall be configured to fail
in a safe manner. Determination of fail safe position
(i.e., 2mA, 20mA, last-value, open, closed, etc.) shall
be determined by the Owner.
3.04 TRAINING.
A. All training
manuals and
software.
classes shall be supplemented with training
"hands-on" experience with hardware and
B. The Supplier shall videotape all
courses. The Supplier shall provide
copies of this tape.
on-site training
the Owner with two
C. On-site training shall include hands-on instruction and
programming of the Owner's actual system.
D. All training costs
price including,
accommodations, and
training courses.
shall be
travel
airfare
included in the contract
expenses, meals, hotel
associated with off-site
E. Each limit switch, push-button, or other input device
shall be connected to only one individual input point.
F. Each output device shall be connected to only one
individual output point.
G. PLC input and output cards shall be configured to fail
in a safe manner. Determination of fail safe position
(i.e., 2mA, 20mA, last-value, open, closed, etc.) shall
be determined by the Owner.
3.05 TRAINING
A. All training
manuals and
software.
classes shall be supplemented with training
"hands-on" experience with hardware and
B. The Supplier shall
courses. The Supplier
copies of this tape.
videotape all on-site training
shall provide the Owner with two
\ \BCNSH03\PROJECTS\PROJ\ 60313.011\16901 . doc 16901-35
I
I
I
' l
I
I
I
I
I
C. On-site training shall include hands-on instruction and
programming of the Owner's actual system.
D. All training costs shall be
price including travel
accommodations, and airfare
training courses.
included in the
expenses, meals,
associated with
contract
hotel
off-site
E. The training schedule should cover operation,
programming and maintenance of all hardware and software
installed. The goal of the training program shall be to
make the Owner self-sufficient in terms of operation,
system maintenance, system expansion (both hardware and
software), system modification and reconfiguration of
all customized application programs.
F. The following training shall be provided along with any
additional training required to satisfy this
specification:
\ \BCNSH0J \ PROJECTS\ PROJ\ 60313. 011\16901 . doc 16901-36
I
I
CUSTOMIZED HARDWARE/SOFTWARE TRAINING ON SITE
Course Title
System
Supplier
Operations
Training
System
Supplier
System
Supplier
Development
Maintenance
Training
&
Description of Course
Operator training will
include the day to day
operation of the system
including; data and set
point entries; alarm
management and all other
operator specific functions
for this project.
Disk space management;
Windows multi tasking
functions; historian chart
display configuration;
report data entries,
charting, exporting/printing
and all other supervisory
functions required for this
project. For both disk and
tape archiving of
historical, security and
alarm information to insure
the long term availability
of these files and to
prevent excess disk space
consumption.
Operation of MMI software.
Configuration of MMI
software. Programming of
ladder logic software.
Tuning of PID loops.
Calibration and maintenance
of all instrumentation and
control equipment installed
by the Supplier. Computer
hardware PLC hardware.
Programming and operation
over modem access.
\ \BCNSH03\PROJECTS\ PROJ\ 60313.011\16901 .doc 16901-37
Length
of
Course
4 days
l st
session
30-45
days
apart
2 days
2nd
session
4 days
3 days
l st
session
30-45
days
apart
3 days
2nd
session
# of
Participan
ts
I
I
I ,,
I
I
I
I
3.06 DOCUMENTATION
A. The Supplier shall document the entire system
provided. This documentation is described in
being
detail
by the below. These documents shall be generated
Supplier and reviewed by the Engineer.
B. As-built documentation shall include all previous
submittals as described in this specification updated to
reflect the as-built system. Any errors in or
modifications to the system resulting from the factory
and/or field acceptance tests shall be incorporated in
this documentation. Provide Smith Seckman Reid with all
CAD drawings at close of project. Smith Seckman Reid
shall own all rights to CAD drawings at the close of
project.
C. Maintenance Manuals shall describe preventative and
corrective procedures required to keep the system in
good operating condition. Hardware maintenance manuals
shall include:
1. Diagnostic procedures for troubleshooting system.
2. Preventative maintenance instructions.
3. Corrective maintenance instructions.
4. Operation information.
5. Spare parts information including identification of
all equipment. Identification shall include all
information necessary to order new equipment. Name
and address of local distributor carrying this
equipment shall also be supplied. All spare parts
equipment lists shall be cross-referenced to
equipment name on drawings and designation on loop
drawings.
D. Provide operating instruction manuals with adequate
information pertaining to the following outline:
1. System specifications.
2. Electrical power requirements.
3. Application considerations.
4. Assembly and installation procedures.
5. Power up procedures.
6. Troubleshooting procedures.
7. Programming procedures.
8. Explanation of internal fault diagnostics.
9. Shut down procedures.
10. Recommended spare parts list.
\ \BCNSH03\ PROJECTS\PROJ\ 60313.011 \ 16901. doc 16901-38
I
I
-I
I
I
I
I
I
These 10 manual sections shall be separated by labeled
tabs.
E. Software Maintenance Manual -This manual shall include
a detailed description of the entire · software system,
how individual software packages interface with each
other, how each software package is maintained and
modified, and the effects that software changes have on
the system. The Software Maintenance Manual shall
include:
1.
2 .
List of all standard software packages provided.
Custom software manuals. These manuals shall
include all information specific to this project
which is not covered in the standard computer
software manufacturers manuals. Each custom program
developed specifically for this project shall
include the following information as a minimum:
a. Table of Contents
b.
c.
ct.
Program Narrative describing an overview of
how the program works including relationships
between database tags, I/O points and
operator interface options. This narrative
should use the same names and tag
identifications used in the actual custom
program.
Narrative of program shall be supplemented by
a flowchart.
A list of all variables used by the program.
These variables should be cross-referenced to
their locations in the actual program to loop
drawings and any other related documentation
showing these variables.
3. All manufacturer's user manuals.
4. A hard copy of all Supplier's configured programs
to document system configuration at the time of
acceptance testing.
F. Operator's Manuals The Supplier shall provide
operator's manuals specifically written for this
project. Manuals should document all information
necessary for the Owner to operate the installed control
system. These manuals shall be written in non-technical
terms and shall be organized for quick access and
reference. Manuals should contain the following
information as a minimum:
\ \BCNSH0J\PR0JECTS\PRW\60313. 011 \ 16901.doc 16901-39
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
1.
2.
3.
4 •
5 .
6.
Overvj ew of the system detailing the purpose of
each major piece of equipment and how it fits into
the overall system.
Detailed description of operator console control
of the process.
Detailed description
operation.
of each control panels
Step-by-step instructions on how to handle non-
steady state system control including start-up,
organized shutdown, emergency shutdown, loss of
power, process upsets.
Details of all
including UPS, tape
Ethernet equipment,
computer hardware operation
drives, disk drives, printers,
etc.
Detailed step-by-step procedure
each piece of process equipment
back to automatic operation.
END OF SECTION
of how to take
into manual and
\ \BCNSH0J \ PROJECTS\PROJ\ 60313.011 \ 16901. doc 16901-40